Anda di halaman 1dari 377

Fusion Applications: Introduction to

Financials Implementation for Release 9

Activity Guide

Edition: R9 4.0
December 2014

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and


other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for
your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or
altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law,
you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce,
publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without
the express authorization of Oracle.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If


you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle
University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This
document is not warranted to be error-free.

Restricted Rights Notice

If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using


the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice
is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS


The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display,
or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable
Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.

Trademark Notice

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other
names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

CONTENTS
Lesson 1:

Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials .....................1

Lesson 2:

Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager .7

Lesson 3:

Overview of Common Applications Configuration ......21

Lesson 4:

Oracle Fusion General Ledger.................................... 33

Lesson 5:

Allocations ................................................................ 74

Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications Activity ................................... 1

Lesson 2: Functional Setup Manager Activities ............................................... 8


How to Create the First Implementation User................................................. 9
Create a User ........................................................................................ 12
How to Assign Roles to Users in OIM (Oracle Identity Manager) ................... 14
Configuring Offerings Demonstration ........................................................ 17
Create an Implementation Project Activity................................................. 19
Lesson 3: Common Applications Activities ...................................................
View Geographies ..................................................................................
Create COAs, Ledgers, Legal Entities & Business Units in Spreadsheet ..........
Search Legal Jurisdictions & Addresses and Create Legal Authorities ............
View Your Legal Entity ............................................................................
Review the System-Generated Legal Reporting Unit ...................................

21
22
23
27
30
32

Lesson 4: General Ledger Activities ............................................................ 33


Shared Components Demonstration ......................................................... 34
View Value Sets Activity.......................................................................... 35
View the Chart of Accounts Structure Activity ............................................ 36
View the Chart of Accounts Instance Activity ............................................. 37
View and Enter Values Activity ................................................................. 39
View an Accounting Hierarchy .................................................................. 42
For Future Reference: How to Create an Account Hierarchy Manually............ 45
Publishing Accounting Hierarchy .............................................................. 48
For Future Reference: How to Create a Duplicate of Account Hierarchies for Reporting
and Allocations ...................................................................................... 49
Create an Account Combination Activity .................................................... 51
Define Cross-Validation Rules Demonstration ............................................ 52
Define Cross-Validation Rules Activity ....................................................... 54
View Accounting Calendar Activity ............................................................ 56
For Future Reference: Create Calendar Manually Activity ............................ 57
Create Currencies Activity ....................................................................... 58
Create Conversion Rate Types Activity ...................................................... 60
View a Primary Ledger Activity ................................................................ 61
For Future Reference: Create a Primary Ledger Manually Activity ................. 62
Specify Ledger Options Activity ................................................................ 63
Review and Submit Accounting Configuration ............................................ 65
Reporting Currencies Activity ................................................................... 66
Create a Ledger Set Activity .................................................................... 68
View Data Access Set Activity .................................................................. 69
Create Data Access Set Activity ............................................................... 70
Segment Value Security Demonstration .................................................... 71
Lesson 5: Allocations Activities ..................................................................
Create an Allocation Rule Activity .............................................................
Copy Allocations Activity .........................................................................
Generate Allocations Activity ...................................................................
Create an Intercompany Allocation Rule Activity ........................................
Generate your Intercompany Allocation Journals ........................................
Generate your Intercompany Allocation Transactions ..................................

74
74
85
86
88
96
97

Lesson 6:

Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting ......................... 99

Lesson 7:

Intercompany Balancing ......................................... 122

Lesson 8:

Oracle Fusion Tax .................................................... 129

Lesson 9:

Viewing Business Units ........................................... 141

Lesson 10:

Oracle Fusion Payables ........................................... 148

Lesson 11:

Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables...154

Lesson 12:

Oracle Fusion Assets ............................................... 162

Lesson 13:

Oracle Fusion Expenses ........................................... 173

Lesson 14:

Oracle Fusion Receivables ....................................... 197

Subledger Accounting Overview ................................................................. 99


Subledger Accounting Activities................................................................. 100
Create Journal Line Description ............................................................... 101
Create Account Rule .............................................................................. 106
Duplicate Journal Entry Rule Set ............................................................. 109
Duplicate Subledger Accounting Method................................................... 112
Create Invoice and Credit Memo, Create Accounting, Review Subledger Journal Entries
.......................................................................................................... 116
Intercompany Activities ........................................................................... 122
View Intercompany Balancing Rules and Ledger Balancing Options.............. 124
Submit and Review Reconciliation Reports ............................................... 127
Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax Activities........................................................ 129
Viewing Calculated Tax on a Receivables Transaction ................................ 130
Creating a Minimum Tax Configuration .................................................... 133
Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Receivables Transaction ......................... 138
Review a Supplier ................................................................................. 147

Lesson 10: Payables Activities .................................................................. 148


Create a Payment Term ......................................................................... 149
Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement ........................... 151
Manage Invoice Options ......................................................................... 152
Manage Payment Options ....................................................................... 153
Lesson 11: Payments Activities ................................................................. 154
Setting Up a Payment System ................................................................ 155
Setting Up Payments ............................................................................. 158
Lesson 12: Assets Activities ...................................................................... 162
Viewing an Asset Demonstration ............................................................. 163
Managing Fiscal Years Activity ................................................................ 164
Managing Asset Calendars Activity .......................................................... 165
Managing Prorate Conventions Activity .................................................... 166
Managing Asset Books Activity ................................................................ 167
Defining Category Key Flexfield Values Activity ......................................... 169
Managing Asset Categories Activity ......................................................... 171
Lesson 13: Expenses Activities.................................................................. 173
Creating an Expense Template................................................................ 174
Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate Demonstration ........ 179
Viewing a Conversion Rate Policy Warning and Error ................................. 181
Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration ................................................. 183
Creating a Corporate Card Program ......................................................... 192
Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration .............. 196
Lesson 14: Receivables Activities .............................................................. 197
Activity Introduction: Receivables System Options Demonstration............... 198
Implementing SmartReceipts.................................................................. 199
Manage AutoMatch Rule Sets.................................................................. 202
Manage Receipt Application Exception Rules ............................................. 205

ii

Manage AutoCash Rule Sets ................................................................... 207


Manage Application Rule Sets ................................................................. 209
Receivables System Options ................................................................... 211
Manage Lockbox ................................................................................... 212
Customer Profile Class ........................................................................... 213
Applying a Receipt to a Transaction ......................................................... 214
Activity Introduction: Defining a Profile Class Demonstration ...................... 216

Lesson 15:

Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables ................. 218

Lesson 16:

Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections ........................ 223

Lesson 17:

Oracle Fusion Cash Management ............................. 235

Lesson 18:

Financial Reporting ................................................. 244

Lesson 19:

OTBI (Online Transactional Business Intelligence) .............. 323

Lesson 20:

Integration with Oracle Fusion Financials Cloud Service


326

Lesson 21:

Entering Suppliers ....................................................... 328

Lesson 22:

Entering Customers ..................................................... 331

Lesson 23:

Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings .....333

Lesson 24:

Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN) ............................. 339

Lesson 15: Payments for Funds Capture Activities ....................................... 218


Creating Funds Capture for Receivables ................................................... 219
Lesson 16: Advanced Collections Activities ................................................. 223
Advanced Collections Overview: Demonstration ........................................ 224
Create Collectors .................................................................................. 227
Create Aging Methods............................................................................ 229
Editing Scoring Formulas ....................................................................... 231
Dunning Templates: Demonstration ........................................................ 234
Lesson 17: Cash Management Activities ..................................................... 235
Cash Management Overview: Demonstration............................................ 236
Create a Bank, Branch and Account ......................................................... 238
Create a Transaction Creation Rule ......................................................... 240
Create Reconciliation Rules .................................................................... 242
Viewing Account Groups in Mobile Financial Reporting Center using Sunburst244
Configure an Account Group Activity........................................................ 257
SmartView ........................................................................................... 259
Financial Reporting Center ..................................................................... 268
Financial Reporting Access Live Reports ................................................ 268
Financial Reporting Access Snapshot Reports ......................................... 281
Mobile Financial Reporting Center ........................................................... 282
Financial Reporting Access Live Reports ................................................ 282
Financial Reporting Studio ...................................................................... 295
Workspace ........................................................................................... 311
Account Inspector ................................................................................. 320

How to Create Employees from HCMs Hire an Employee UI ....................... 336


Using OSN ........................................................................................... 339
Configuring OSN ................................................................................... 341
Enabling OSN for Mobile Devices (iPhone, iPad, iOS and Android) ............... 343
OSN Social Objects in Fusion R8 ............................................................. 343
Downloading OSN applications for mobile................................................. 344
Configuring connection of your mobile to OSN .......................................... 345
Configuring Connection of your Mobile to OSN .......................................... 348

iii

Lesson 25:

Appendix ................................................................. 351

Appendix Activities .................................................................................. 351


Prepare for User and Role Management ................................................... 352
Prepare the IT Security Manager Job Role (NA for Cloud) ........................... 353
Synchronize LDAP Users and Roles to Initialize HCM User Management ....... 355
Create Security Administrators (NA for Cloud) .......................................... 356
Fusion Security Activities.......................................................................... 357
Prepare for User and Role Management ................................................... 358
Prepare the IT Security Manager Job Role ................................................ 360
Synchronize LDAP Users and Roles to Initialize HCM User Management ....... 367
Create Security Administrators ............................................................... 369
Create Implementation Project Managers ................................................. 371

iv

Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials

Lesson 1:

Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials

Getting Started in Oracle Fusion Applications Activity

Background
This activity has been provided to introduce you to Oracle Fusion Applications and
the basic navigation features.
Activity Scope
This demonstration introduces you to the basic features of the Oracle Fusion
Applications user interface, and shows you how to proceed after you sign in.

Sign in as Your User (as assigned by the instructor), such as


FASxx.Student where xx is the number assigned to you.

Perform the following tasks:


1. After you sign in, start on the Oracle Fusion Applications home page, which
contains one or more tabs, or dashboards.
2. Use dashboards to navigate to relevant pages and monitor the status of
underlying transactions for a particular business domain, for example sales or
projects.
3. The first tab is always the Welcome dashboard. You may have other
dashboards, depending on the roles assigned to you.
4. The global area at the top is always available no matter where you are in Oracle
Fusion Applications. Use the global area to navigate and access features that
are relevant to any page that you are on.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials

5. The menus on the global area provide access to features relevant to any page in
Oracle Fusion Applications.

6. Select the User Login drop down on the far right.


7. Under Personalization, select Set Preferences. You can set preferences such
as time zone, language, date formats, time formats, reset passwords, etc.
8. Click the Applications Help link. This will open a separate window.
Note: If you are unable to access Help, make sure pop-up blockers are off.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials


9. Search on the following: Dashboard.
10. From the help Type dropdown, select Video.

11. From the Search Results, select the Using the Asset Accounting Dashboard
link.
12. From Viewing Options, select See it to play the User Productivity Kit (UPK)
demonstration.
13. Close the UPK demonstration.
14. Close Oracle Fusion Applications Help.
15. Click on the Home page icon in the global area.
16. Use the Favorites and Recent Items icon (the star) to access pages that you
frequently use, without having to remember the navigation sequence. You can
perform actions similar to your browsers favorites feature, such as add, edit, and
organize favorites.
17. Click the Tags link. Tags can be shared so that anyone searching for specific
records can find them based on common tags. Tags let you find specific records,
for example invoices and opportunities, using keywords.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials


18. Use the Recent Items tab to return to pages that you recently accessed. The list
usually includes but is not limited to pages from a single session.
19. The Watchlist icon (the flag) contains a set of shortcuts to items that you want
to track.
You can click any Watchlist item to navigate to the corresponding page. The
Watchlist is also available by default as a region on the Welcome dashboard.
20. Click the Navigator link which opens the main menu for Oracle Fusion
Applications.

21. You get the My Information and Tools submenus, as well as other submenus.
The menu options available are based on the roles assigned to your user. If you
are a manager, you also get the Manager Resources submenu.
22. Click the General Accounting: Journals link.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials

23. You are taken to the Journals work area.


24. A work area contains the complete set of tasks, reports, embedded analytics,
searches, or other content that you need to accomplish the tasks associated with
a business goal. Work areas consist of many regions, or areas.
25. The regional area is located on the left side. Depending on the work area, you
can search business objects, such as invoices, which affects what is displayed in
the local area, the middle region where you do your work.
26. In the global area next to your user name, the Oracle icon turns into the Busy
icon, which spins as the search runs and turns back into the Oracle icon when
the search finishes. The icons indicate the state of the application in general. You
also see the Busy icon, for example, when pages are loading, data is refreshing,
and so on.
27. Click the first Journal Batch link and then highlight one of the lines. When you
select a record in the lines table, any contextual information for the record is
displayed in the contextual area on the right hand side of the page.
Note: You may need to click the Refresh icon (the two blue arrows) to the right of
the Projected Balances title.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Introduction to Oracle Fusion Financials


28. The Projected Balances pane is displayed and can show additional information
specific to the selected record.
29. As needed, you can resize or collapse the regional or contextual area to
dedicate more space to the local area.
30. Click the Collapse Pane button (the arrow in the middle of the panel).
31. You can return to the Oracle Fusion Applications home page at any time by
clicking the Home icon.
NOTE: Refer to these Oracle Fusion Applications Help demonstrations for more
information on navigating Oracle Fusion:

Personalizing Pages

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Lesson 2:

Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Lesson 2: Functional Setup Manager Activities

The following are activities and demonstrations for Oracle Fusion Functional Setup
Manager:

How to Create the First Implementation User

Create a User

How to Assign Roles to Users in OIM (Oracle Identity Manager)

Configure Offerings demonstration.

Create an Implementation Project.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

How to Create the First Implementation User


Note: The very first user you need to create before you can create an Implementation
Project is an Implementation User, such as an Application Implementation Consultant.
NOTE: For this class, because we are using a demo environment and entering
transactions across modules, you can skip this step. This step is here for future
reference.
1. Login with your fusion login userid and password. (This user must be a
superuser, such as FAADMIN.)
2. Select Navigator> Setup and Maintenance
3. From the All Tasks tab, enter in the Name field Create Implementation Users.
Note: You are searching for this task name directly.

4. Click the Go to Task icon for this task. This opens Identity Manager.
5. Click on the Administration link on the top right hand corner of the main page.

6. Click Create User and enter the following:


First Name

Last Name

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Email

User Login

Password

Confirm Password

Organization- Xellerate Users.

User Type: Choose Anything

Click the Save button.

7. Click the Roles tab.


8. In the Roles tab, the ALL USERS role will already be assigned by default.
9. Click Assign icon to bring up the window to search for additional roles to add to
the user.
10. In the Display Name field, search on Application Implementation Consultant.
Select it and choose the Add button on the bottom right. Click Assign to bring up
the window to search for additional roles to add to the user.
11. Add the following Roles:

10

Application Implementation Consultant

IT Security Manager

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATORS

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

OIMAdministrators

Human Capital Management Application Administrator

Human Resource Manager

Employee (This is needed for Scheduled Processes to show up on the


Navigator.)

Close the window. You will need to log in with your userid and enter a new
password.
Note: If you subsequently add roles to your user, then you must run the process
called Run Users and Roles Synchronization Process. This is a task in
Functional Setup Manager. Then you must completely log out and log back in to
see the new roles you can access. You could also run the process from ESS:
Retrieve Latest LDAP Changes.
You will now have access to the Manage Users page and New Person page
(Navigator > Manager Resources > Manage Users or Navigator > Manager
Resources > New Person.)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

11

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Create a User
Because we are performing transactional entry for this class across all financial
products, we need to have a valid employee.
NOTE: For Financials only implementations, you should use the Manage Users UI, not
the Hire an Employee UI.
How to Create Users Using the Manage Users UI
1. Login as your user, such as FASxx.Student where xx is your number.
(Password given in classroom).
2. Select Navigator > Manager Resources > Manage Users. (Note: You might
have to hit the F11 key to hide the toolbar to reveal all the navigator items.)
3. Select the Create icon and enter the following required fields:
Last Name
First Name
Email
User Name
Person Type: Employee
Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity
Business Unit: US1 Business Unit
Click the AutoProvision Roles button to have the Employee role
automatically assigned.
Note: (The Employee role is required to see Scheduled Processes in the
Navigator.)
Note: If you defined a Role Mapping in advance, then you can automatically
have the system add and remove roles based on your Role Mapping criteria.
For example, if your user gets promoted, changes jobs, or leaves the
company, the role mapping will automatically provision the appropriate roles.
For more information on Role Mappings, see Creating Users/Employees in
HCM Using Role Mappings.
4. Click Save and Close.
5. Requery your user in the Manage Users page.
6. Highlight the record and select Actions > Manage Expense Information.

12

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

7. Enter an Address and a default Expense Account: 101.10.60501.121.000.000


8. Choose an Expense Check Send-to Address: Home or Office

9. Click Save and Close.


FYI: The following steps show another way to add Expense Information to those users you
entered in the Manage Users UI (assuming you have HCM Administrator role assigned. (For
this class, HCM_IMPL has full access to HCM.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Select Navigator> Workforce Management > Person Management.


Query the user and click the name of the user.
Select the Manage Employment link.
Click Edit > Correct. Click OK to the Correct Employment pop-up.
Make sure a Business Unit is assigned to the employee.
Scroll down to the Expenses Information region. Add the Default Expense Account and
select an Expense Check Send to-Address.
7. Click Save and Close.

8. Click Submit.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

13

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

How to Assign Roles to Users in OIM (Oracle Identity Manager)


1. Select Navigator> Tools > Setup and Maintenance
2. From the All Tasks tab, in the Name field enter Create Implementation Users.
Note: You are searching for this task name directly.

3. Click the Go to Task icon for this task. This opens Identity Manager.
4. Click on the Administration link on the top right hand corner of the main page.

5. Search for your User in the top left Search field.


6. Select your user link and then click the Roles tab.
7. In the Roles tab, the ALL USERS role and Employee role will already be
assigned.
8. Click the Assign icon to add additional roles to the user.
9. In the Display Name field, search on Application Implementation Consultant.
Select it and choose the Add button on the bottom right.

14

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager


10. Click Assign icon again and add as many Roles as you wish. You will not be
using your user for this class because you will use the user assigned to you,
such as FASxx.Student where xx is your number. This exercise is to help you
assign roles in the future.
1. Application Implementation Consultant
2. IT Security Manager
3. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATORS
4. OIMAdministrators
5. Accounts Payable Manager US1 Business Unit
6. Accounts Payable Specialist US1 Business Unit
7. Accounts Receivable Manager US1 Business Unit
8. Asset Accountant US Corporate Book
9. Asset Accounting Manager US Corporate Book
10. Buyer
11. Cash Manager
12. Collections Manager US1 Business Unit
13. General Accounting Manager US Primary Ledger
14. Intercompany Accountant France I/C Org
15. Intercompany Accountant UK I/C Org
16. Intercompany Accountant US1 I/C Org
17. Intercompany Accountant US2 I/C Org
18. Supplier Administrator (This is the seeded role that can create suppliers.
Also, the worker associated with your login must be defined as a
Procurement Agent in the Business Unit where you are trying to add the
site and site assignment. Also the agent needs to have the Manage
Supplier Task Access granted.)
19. Tax Manager US1 Business Unit
11. Click Reset Password icon on the top left. Enter and confirm your password.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

15

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager


12. Close the window to close Identity Manager. Close all Browser windows. Launch
Fusion Applications again and log in as your new user. You will need to enter a
new password, which can be the same.
Note: If you subsequently add roles to your user, then you must run the process
called Run Users and Roles Synchronization Process. This is a task in
Functional Setup Manager. Then you must completely log out and log back in to
see the new roles you can access. You could also run the following process from
ESS: Retrieve Latest LDAP Changes. This process is whats run behind the
scenes when you submit the task.

16

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Configuring Offerings Demonstration


Background
You are an implementation manager for your financial applications. In preparation for
implementation, you need to review the Oracle Fusion Financials offering.
NOTE: After implementation is completed, configure a maintenance offering to enable
access to those tasks that require ongoing maintenance such as Manage Accounting
Calendars.

Configuring Offerings Demonstration


Step

Act ion

1.

Select Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance > Configure Offerings link.

2. The Configure Offerings page shows a list of the same offerings you have seen on

the Getting Started page.


You must have the Application Implementation Manager or Application
Implementation Consultant role to have permission to configure offerings.
3. The Provisioned column shows whether or not an offering is provisioned.
4. You can click the Description button to view a description of the offering.

Click the Description button for Financials.


5. For this particular offering, you can manage financial flows and set up subledger

accounting and tax configuration.


Click the Done button.
6. Expand the Financials offering (via the folder icon) to find its optional features,

called Select Feature Choices. If an offering does not have Feature Choices, a
folder icon is not displayed.
7. Feature selections can be locked individually to prevent users from making

changes to them by clicking the Lock icon.


8. Some of the Features may have other dependent features. You select

progressively for those dependent features.


For example, the Local Installation of Help Options region has other dependent
features that are relevant only if the feature is selected. Therefore, when you select
Local Installation of Help, additional features are presented for selection.
9. To lock all feature selections at once, click the Lock All Selections button

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

17

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager


10. You can also Reset any change you made to the last saved selection.
11. Click the Save and Close button.
12. The Implementation Status column indicates the current status of the

implementation. The default status is set to Not Started, which you can change if
the offering has been enabled for Implementation.
13. Click the Not Started link then select In Progress.
14. Click the Save and Close button.
15. You are now ready to generate setup tasks and start implementing the offerings of

your choice.
16.

18

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager

Create an Implementation Project Activity

Background
Before you begin creating your enterprise, your implementation consultant or system
administrator must create an implementation project. An implementation project defines
the scope of the implementation. The implementation project can be populated by
adding one or more related offerings or task lists.
In this example, you will be adding the Financials offering and required product task
lists.
Activity Scope

Log in as the user assigned to you, such as FASxx.Student where xx is the


number assigned to you.

Perform the following tasks:


1. Navigate from the Home page: Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance >
Click the Manage Implementation Projects link.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXImplementation Project, replacing XX with your
initials or the number assigned to you by your instructor. Note that when you tab
out of the Name field, the Code and Description will populate for you and can be
modified if required.
4. Tab to the Code field. XXIMPLEMENTATION_PROJECT will default.
Note: This must be all caps, no spaces.
5. Optionally change the default Description: XXImplementation Project.
6. Click the Next button. (The Create Implementation Project: Select Offerings
to Implement page will be displayed.)
7. Expand the Financials offering.
8. Select the Include checkbox for Financials, and all of the nested offerings:
Supplier Invoice Processing, Expenses, Fixed Assets, Customer Invoice
Processing, Collections, Revenue Management, and Intercompany.
9. Click the Save and Open Project button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

19

Lesson 2: Overview of Oracle Fusion Functional Setup Manager


10. Expand the Financials task list and view the implementation tasks that were
included in the Financials offering. You will work with most of these task lists
during this course.
11. Click the Select and Add icon

to add more tasks.

12. Add the following by doing a search on %Rapid Impl%:

Define Financials Configuration for Rapid Implementation

13. Click Done.


14. Click Done to close the Manage Implementation Projects window.

20

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

Lesson 3:

Overview of Common Applications Configuration

Lesson 3: Common Applications Activities

The following are activities and demonstrations for Enterprise Structures:

View Geographies

Create Chart of Accounts, Ledgers, Legal Entities and Business Units in


Spreadsheet

Search Legal Jurisdictions & Addresses and Create Legal Authorities

Search Legal Entities

Review the System-Generated Legal Reporting Unit

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

21

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

View Geographies
Activity Scope
Rapid Implementation spreadsheets allow you to quickly set up data. You will learn how
to query the spreadsheets and view geographies.
1. From your Implementation Project, expand Define Financials Configuration for
Rapid Implementation > Define Common Financials Configuration for Rapid
Implementation.
2. For Manage Geographies, select the Go to Task icon.
3. Search by Country Name United States.
4. Click on the hyperlink as well as all of the green check marks to view the
information. United States has already been defined in this environment, but if
you query another country, you could create their geography information. The
geography information was loaded using a third party tax vendor, Vertex. Note:
Vertex can only be used to upload geography info., not tax rates. Tax rates can
be integrated with CCH.

22

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

Create COAs, Ledgers, Legal Entities & Business Units in


Spreadsheet
Legal Entity
You will define a legal entity for each registered company or other entity recognized in
law for which you want to perform intercompany trading, record assets, liabilities, and
income, or pay transaction taxes.
1. For the task called Create Chart of Accounts, Ledger, Legal Entities, and
Business Units in Spreadsheet, click the Go To Task icon.
It will open a spreadsheet. The first sheet provides detailed instructions.
2. Click the second sheet, COA, Calendar, and Ledger.
3. Enter the following:

Name: XX Ledger

Period Frequency: Monthly

Adjusting Periods: Once at Year End

Fiscal Year Start Date: 01/01/2013

Note: If you require a more unique calendar, then you must define it manually in
the Manage Accounting Calendars page.
4. Then for the Segments, add the following:
Segment

Segment Label

Short Prompt

Display Width

Company

Primary Balancing
Segment

Co

Cost Center

Cost Center Segment

CC

Account

Natural Account

Acct

Intercompany

Intercompany
Segment

IC

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

23

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

5. Click the 3rd tab, Business Units and enter the following to create 2 business
units for two different legal entities.
Name

Default Legal Entity Name

XX US Business Unit

XX US Legal Entity

XX Canada Business Unit

XX Canada Legal Entity

6. Click the 4th tab, Companies and Legal Entities.


7. Copy and paste the hierarchy from the sample spreadsheet provided in class,
Sample_Data_for_RapidImplementationForGeneralLedger.xlsm. This file is
located in the Activity Guide and student Guide folder
https://beehiveonline.oracle.com/content/dav/Oracle/Fusion_ERP_Partner_Imple
mentation_Training_Workspace/Documents/Financials/Implementation%20Traini
ng%20for%20Release%209/Activity%20Guide%20and%20Student%20Guide/Sa
mple_Data_for_RapidImplementationForGeneralLedger.xlsm
8. Be sure to change the following:

24

Name field to be your legal entity names for the US and Canada
legal entities.

Identifier

Registration Number

Reporting Unit Registration Number

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

9. Click the 5th tab, Natural Accounts.


10. Copy and paste the natural account hierarchy from the sample spreadsheet,
Sample_Data_for_RapidImplementationForGeneralLedger.xlsm.
11. Note that there are Natural Account segment values that are mapped to "Owner's
Equity - Retained Earnings", "Asset - Intercompany Payable", "Asset Intercompany Receivable" Account Types. These mappings will be utilized to set
up Default Accounts in the system.

12. Click the Financials Sequences tab.


13. Copy and paste the data from the sample spreadsheet,
Sample_Data_for_RapidImplementationForGeneralLedger.xlsm.
14. Click on the 2nd tab, COA, Calendar and Ledger.
15. Click Add Segment Sheets. This will add a tab for Cost Center.
16. Click the Cost Center tab and copy and paste the cost center hierarchy from the
sample worksheet,
Sample_Data_for_RapidImplementationForGeneralLedger.xlsm.
17. Click on the 2nd tab, COA, Calendar and Ledger.
18. Click Step 1: Validate. You should receive a message that validation was
successful, no errors.
Note: If you get the following error: "Compile error: Can't find project or
library" then this is a problem with your MS Excel setup. Please go to Design
mode or press ALT+F11 to switch to the Visual Basic Editor, then Tools ->
References and clear the check box for the type library or object library marked
as "MISSING".
19. Click Step 2: Generate Chart of Accounts File.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

25

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration


20. Save the zip file locally.
21. Click Step 3: Generate Ledger, LE and BU File.
22. Save the zip file locally.
23. For the task called Upload Chart of Accounts, click the Go to Task icon. This
launches the Upload Enterprise Structures and Hierarchies process.
24. Select the Upload Enterprise Structure option.
25. In the Data File, click Browse and select the ChartOfAccounts.zip file.
26. Click Submit.

27. Navigate to the Scheduled Processes page (N) Tools > Scheduled Processes.
Verify that the process was completed without errors or warnings. Click Done.
One student selected by the instructor will do the following in each env.
After all students have uploaded their charts of accounts:
1. For the Deploy Chart of Accounts task, click the Go to Task icon.
2. Click Search, then click the Deploy Flexfield button. This will deploy
the charts of accounts for all charts of accounts in the system.
3. Refresh the page until the green checkmark appears and verifies
that the deployment was successful.
4. Wait for the process to complete without errors. (Warnings are OK,
but should be investigated. If you get a warning about analytics, it is
probably because you enabled BI for a segment and the RPD to
COA Mapping hasnt been done yet.). In Lesson 4, the View the
Chart of Accounts Instance Activity, shows you how to disable BI for
each segment.
28. For the Upload Ledger, Legal Entities and Business Units task, click the Go
to Task icon.
29. Click on the Upload Enterprise Structure option. For the Data File, click Browse
and upload the FinancialsCommonEntities.zip file.
30. Click Submit.
31. Navigate to the Scheduled Processes page. Verify that the process was
completed without errors or warnings. Click Done.
Note: You can continue on to the next task while the processes complete.

26

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

Search Legal Jurisdictions & Addresses and Create Legal Authorities


Activity Scope
In this example, you will learn how legal jurisdictions, legal addresses for legal entities
and reporting units, and legal authorities are created. Legal jurisdictions and related
legal authorities are defined to support multiple legal entity registrations.
Legal Jurisdictions
Review an existing legal jurisdiction by following these steps:
1. Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance > Manage Implementation
Project >
2. Query your XXImplementation Project and click the link.
3. Expand the following: Financials > Define Common Applications
Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures for Financials >
Define Legal Jurisdictions and Authorities for Financials.
4. For Manage Legal Jurisdictions, click Go to Task icon.
5. In Legislative Category dropdown, select Commercial law and click Search.
6. Select the link for any legal jurisdiction to view the details.
View the following fields:

Name

Territory

Legislative Category: Hover over the question mark in front of the field to
see the embedded help: This represents the type of law associated with a
given registration.

Identifying: Yes indicates the first jurisdiction a legal entity must register with
to do business in a country.

Start Date is optional. You can also add an End Date to indicate a date that
the jurisdiction may no longer be used.

Legal Entity Registration Code and Legal Reporting Unit Registration


Code.

Legal Functions. Optionally, you may enter one or more.

7. Select Cancel.
Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

27

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration


Legal Addresses for Legal Entities and Reporting Units
A legal address is the address a legal entity or reporting unit uses to register with a legal
authority. A legal entity and reporting unit may use different addresses for different
authorities and hence, may have more than one registered address. This legal address
must be located within the territory entered.
Review an existing legal address for legal entities and reporting units by following
these steps:
1. Click Go to Task for Manage Legal Addresses.
2. Search Country: United States.
3. Select a row header for any address entry.
4. Select Edit.
5. View the Location Update fields.
6. Click Cancel to close the Location Update window. (Do not save any updates.)
7. Click Cancel to close the Manage Legal Addresses window.
Legal Authorities
Create a legal authority as follows:
1. Click Go to Tasks for Manage Legal Authorities. (This task is above the
Manage Legal Addresses task.)
2. Click Create.
3. Enter Name: XXLegal Authority, replacing XX with your initials or the number
assigned to you by your instructor.
4. Enter Tax Authority Type: Collecting and reporting.
5. Add a Legislative Category: Local Tax.
6. In the Addresses region, select Create.
7. Enter Address Line 1, 121 Spear Street, Suite 400.
8. Enter Postal Code: 94105.
Note: Wait for the system to render the selection and select 94105, San
Francisco, San Francisco, California. The remainder of the address fields
populate for you.

28

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration


NOTE: You can optionally enter Address Purpose details.
9. Select Add Row.
10. Select Purpose: Business.
11. The Purpose from Date will default to today's date.
12. Select OK.
The Site Number is automatically assigned.
13. Select Save and Close.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

29

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

View Your Legal Entity


You will view the legal entity you defined using your Rapid Implementation spreadsheet.
A legal entity is recognized in law for which you want to perform intercompany trading,
record assets, liabilities and income, or pay transaction taxes.
NOTE: Working within an implementation project is required because you must select a
scope value from within the implementation project. In this example, the scope value is
the legal entity that you created.
Expand Financials > Define Common Applications Configuration for Financials
> Define Enterprise Structures for Financials> Define Legal Entities for
Financials
1. For Manage Legal Entity task, click Go to Task.
The following window appears:

2. Select Select and Add then Apply and Go to Task button.


3. Select your US Legal Entity and click Save and Close at the very bottom.
4. Clear the Payroll statutory unit check box.
NOTE: If your legal entity should be registered to report payroll tax and social
insurance, then you would select this check box.
5. Check the Legal employer check box to indicate you have employees at this
legal entity.
6. For Payroll Statutory Unit, select your US Legal Entity.
7. Click Save and Go to Task > Manage Legal Entity Registrations.

30

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

A legal entity registration is the record of a party's identity related details with the
appropriate government or legal authorities for the purpose of claiming and ensuring
legal and or commercial rights and responsibilities.
A legal entity registration with the same name as that of the legal entity will be created
by default.

8. View the information, then click Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

31

Lesson 3: Overview of Common Applications Configuration

Review the System-Generated Legal Reporting Unit


Legal Reporting Unit (A.K.A Tax reporting unit to group employee records for tax and
social reporting)
When a legal entity is created, a legal reporting unit with the same name as that of
the entity is also automatically created.
Review your legal reporting unit by following these steps.
1. Expand Define Legal Reporting Units for Financials.
2. Select the Go To Task for Manage Legal Reporting Unit.
Note: If you are prompted to select a Scope value, select the XX US Legal Entity
you created.
In the Legal Reporting Unit field, choose Select and Add, then Apply and Go
to Task button.

3. Select the row header for XXLegal Entity.


Note: Do not select the hyperlink.
4. Select Save and Close.

32

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Lesson 4:

Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Lesson 4: General Ledger Activities


The following are demonstrations and activities for Oracle Fusion General
Ledger:

Shared Components Demonstration

Create Value Sets Demonstration and Activity

Create a Chart of Accounts Demonstration

Create a Chart of Accounts Structure Activity

Create a Chart of Accounts Instance Activity

Enter Values Activity

Create an Accounting Hierarchy Demonstration

Create an Account Combination Activity

Define Cross-Validation Rules Demonstration

Create a Calendar Activity

Create Currencies Demonstration and Activity

Create Conversion Rate Types Demonstration and Activity

Create a Primary Ledger Demonstration and Activity

Ledger Options Demonstration

Journal Processing Ledger Options Demonstration

Specify Ledger Options Activity

Reporting Currencies Demonstration

Create a Ledger Set Demonstration

Data Access Set Security Demonstration and Activity

Create an Allocation Rule Activity

Generate an Allocation Activity

View a Financial Report in HTML Activity

Configure an Account Group Activity

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

33

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Shared Components Demonstration

Background
The chart of accounts, calendar, and currencies as well as journal source and category
are shared across the ledger and related subledgers.
Activity Scope
Perform this demonstration to show the three C's and other shared components
in the Create Journal page:
1. Select Navigator > General Accounting > Journals > Create Journals. Make
sure your data access set is US Primary Ledger.
2. Point out the Accounting Period which is populated from the Calendar.
3. Point out the Source of Manual which defaults on a manual journal.
4. Point out the Currency field.
5. Point out the Category field.
6. Click the Search and Select Category down arrow to show the various
categories.
7. Select the Category of Adjustment.
8. Click the Currency down arrow to show all the enabled currencies.
9. Click on the Select: Account icon at the end of Line 1 in the Journal Lines
region to show the segments and default values of an accounting flexfield.
10. Select the Search: Account drop down arrow in the Account segment.
11. Select 11200 Cash.
12. Click OK to show how an account combination is displayed.
13. Explain the segments and the separator.
14. Click the Cancel button to exit the page.

34

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View Value Sets Activity


Background
Value sets are created as the first step in the chart of accounts configuration. The value
sets are then assigned to the chart of accounts instance. Do not create values until after
assigning your values sets to the chart of accounts segments because this step is
needed to establish which value set attributes should be exposed.
Note: It is strongly recommended that you choose the Value Data Type of
Character and Value Subtype of Text. These can never be changed. If you only
want to use numbers, just define only numeric values for that value set. If you
choose the Value Subtype of Numeric digits only, then you will be stuck with your
decision and you will never be able to use characters or letters for your values in
the future.
Activity Scope
View the value set for your chart of accounts that was system generated from the Rapid
Implementation spradsheet: Account XXLedger, replacing XX with your initials.
1. From your implementation project, expand Financials > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures for
Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart of
Accounts > Manage Chart of Accounts Value Sets > Go to Task.
2. For the Module field, select General Ledger and click Search.
3. You should see all your chart of accounts segments that start with the segment
type following by the name of your ledger, such as Account XX Ledger, Cost
Center XX Ledger, etc.
4. Click the Edit icon for one or more of your chart of accounts segments value sets
to view its attributes.
5. Click Cancel > Cancel unless you made changes.
Note: Table-Validated Value Sets in the Cloud is only supported if the table or view is already
provided by Oracle. (It cannot be a table created by the customer). Thus, customers can only use
table validated value sets if:
He only wants to reference a single table or view. (Cannot join multiple tables / views)
He is okay with not adding any filter conditions. In other words, the values in the table are
valid values.
The table or view already contains columns named flex_value_attribute1 through 20 and
custom_value_attribute1 through 10.
Because of these restrictions, table-validated value sets are not really supported for cloud
customers.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

35

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View the Chart of Accounts Structure Activity


Activity Scope
View your chart of accounts structure called: XXChart of Account replacing XX
with your initials.
1. Click Go to Task for the Manage Chart of Accounts Structures task.
2. Click Search button.
3. Select Accounting Flexfield.
4. Click Manage Structures button.
5. Click Search.
6. You should see your XX Ledger COA Structure.
7. Select it and click the Edit icon. You should see the following:

8. Save.
9. In the Segments table, you should now see 4 segments in your structure.
10. Click the Edit icon to view each segment.
11. Click Cancel.
12. Click Done to return to the Manage Chart of Accounts Structures page.

36

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View the Chart of Accounts Instance Activity


1. From the Manage Chart of Accounts Structures page, click Manage Structure
Instances button.
2. In the Manage Key Flexfields Structure Instances page, click Search.
3. You should see your COA Instance named after your XX Ledger.
4. Select it and click Edit.
5. You should see the following:

6. For each segment, select it and click the Edit icon.


7. Clear the BI enabled check box for all segments.

Note: When you enable Business Intelligence for a segment, it tells OTBI that you want to use that
segments values in OTBI reports to filter reports by specific values. For example, if you want to see
all AP invoices by a specific Company Value, you would enable BI for that segment. Out of the box,
we always show the entire account combination for transactions because an entire combination is
treated as a text string. You would ONLY enable BI if you want to run reports by specific values for
that segment, but you will need a System Administrator to perform a RPD to COA Mapping so that
OTBI reports dont break.
Note: If you wanted to have default values for a segment, you would select Default type of Constant
and enter the value, such as 01, that you want to have defaulted in all data entry pages. Of course,
you must make sure you have this value defined.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

37

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


Note: You would only assign a Tree Code if you want to use a hierarchy in cross validation rules,
chart of accounts mappings, revaluations, data access sets, and segment value security rules. In
other words, this Tree Code is used for things other than reporting or allocations. You can only assign
one Tree Code per segment.

8. Click OK and move to the next segment.


9. Click Save and Close > Done.

38

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View and Enter Values Activity


Note: In this lesson, you are not creating account combinations; you are only viewing
and creating the lists of individual values for each segment. REMEMBER: You can only
define values AFTER values sets have been associated to a chart of accounts instance.
Here's the list of words we should NEVER use for parent nodes:
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E12825_01/epm.111/esb_dbag/frameset.htm?esb_restricted_
names.htm
For example, NEVER use ALL or the name of the segment as a value. You can use T.
When naming dimensions, members, and aliases in the database, follow these rules:

At the beginning of dimension or member names, do not use the characters


listed below. Essbase will not be able to create cubes successfully if you use
special characters. You should avoid the following special characters in your
Value Description as well.
Restricted Characters for Dimension, Member, and Alias Names
Character

Description

at sign

backslash

{}

brace

comma

dash, hyphen, or minus

equal sign

<

less than sign

()

parentheses

period

plus sign

'

single quotation mark

underscore

vertical bar

Do not place spaces at the beginning or end of names. Essbase ignores such
spaces.
Do not use these words as dimension or member names:
ALL

AND

ASSIGN

AVERAGE

CALC

CALCMBR

COPYFORWARD

CROSSDIM

CURMBRNAME

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

39

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

DIM

DIMNAME

DIV

DYNAMIC

EMPTYPARM

EQ

EQOP

EXCEPT

EXP

EXPERROR

FLOAT

FUNCTION

GE

GEN

GENRANGE

GROUP

GT

ID

IDERROR

INTEGER

LE

LEVELRANGE

LOOPBLOCK

LOOPPARMS

LT

MBR

MBRNAME

MBRONLY

MINUS

MISSING

MUL

MULOP

NE

NON

NONINPUT

NOT

OR

PAREN

PARENPARM

PERCENT

PLUS

RELOP

SET

SKIPBOTH

SKIPMISSING

SKIPNONE

SKIPZERO

TO

TOLOCALRATE

TRAILMISSING

TRAILSUM

UMINUS

UPPER

VARORXMBR

XMBRONLY

$$$UNIVERSE$$$

#MISSING

Note: If you enable Dynamic Time Series members, do not use the associated
generation namesHistory, Year, Season, Period, Quarter, Month, Week, or
Day.
View and Enter Values
1. For the Manage Chart of Accounts Value Sets Values task, select the Go to
Task icon.
Note: This UI is the exact same UI as Manage Chart of Accounts Value Set.
2. Find your Account XX Ledger value set.
3. Click Manage Values button.
4. Click Search to search all existing values.
5. Click Account T and click Edit. Change the Description from Default to All
Values.
6. Click Save and Close.
5. Click Create icon. Create the following value:

40

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Value

17820

Description

Enabled

Summary

Allow Posting
and Budgeting

Account Type

Office Equipment

Yes

No

Yes, Yes

Asset

Note: The Reconciliation Flag will not be used as it is not in scope for V1, hence
the values are set to No.
Use the Third Party Control account if you want to prevent manual journal entries
against certain accounts, such as your Receivables and AP Liability Accounts.
7. Click Save and Close > Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

41

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View an Accounting Hierarchy

Background
Your company uses hierarchies in reports, cross validation rules revaluations, segment
value security, allocations, and COA Mapping.
Note: Even though you could theoretically use the same tree for all of the above
processes, you would typically create at least two different trees: One for reporting and
allocations and another for cross-validation rules, segment value security, revaluations
and COA Mappings. You need to carefully consider the usage for your trees. If using
the tree for reporting and allocations, you need to flatten the rows to be able to use
drilldown in Smartview and you must publish the tree to view the hierarchy in the
Essbase cubes. If using the tree for other purposes outside of reporting and allocations,
then you must flatten the rows, but you do not need to publish the hierarchy. If using the
tree for OTBI, you must flatten the columns.
Note: You should define your hierarchies BEFORE you enter/upload journal entries. If
you create hierarchies AFTER you have posted journals, then you must make sure no
posted balances have been posted to parent values that were erroneously flagged as a
child value. This will cause major issues in creating your Essbase cube if you change a
child value to a parent after balances have been posted.
Activity Scope
View an account hierarchy for your account segment using your value set Account XX
Ledger that will be used for reporting and allocations.
NOTE: Before you begin this, you need to know the exact name of your value set on
the natural account segment.
View a Tree (Hierarchy)
1. From your implementation project, expand Financials > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures for
Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart Of
Accounts
2. For Manage Account Hierarchies task, select the Go to Task icon.

42

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


Use the Manage Account Hierarchies page to search, create, and edit
account hierarchies.
3. Find your Account XX Ledger tree and expand it.
Notice the system automatically created two tree versions: one is called Base
and the other is Current. The system did this when you uploaded your
spreadsheet.
NOTE: Best practice is to have a Current and Baseline version of your tree at all
times. Create the Current version first and then duplicate it and name it Baseline
later.
4. Select the Account XX Ledger Base Tree Version. Click the Edit icon.
5. Click OK to the warning message that your version will be placed in Draft status.
6. Change the Effective Start and End Dates to 12/1/13 and 12/31/13 in the date
format suggested in the UI.
7. Click the Next button.
8. In the Manage Account Hierarchies: Specify Nodes page, expand value
32000 > 19999 > 18000 > 17000
Notice 17820, the new account you added, does not appear in the hierarchy.
9. Select 17000, then click the green + to add value 17820 under the 17000
parent.
10. Click OK, then Submit.
11. Select the same tree version, Base, and view the hierarchy to make sure 17820
was added.
12. Do the same thing for the Current version but change the effective dates to
01/01/2014 to 12/31/2016 since two different versions cannot have overlapping
date ranges.
Complete the Account Hierarchy
1. Highlight your tree version. (Note: You need to expand your tree to select the
VERSION and you must do this for both the Base and Current versions.)
2. Click the Actions > Audit.
3. Click Online Audit to start the Audit process. Once the audit is performed, the
status of the tree version can be set to active.
4. Click OK > Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

43

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


5. Select your tree version and click Actions > Flatten> Row Flattening.
Row flattening optimizes parent-child information for run-time performance by
storing an additional column in a table for all parents of a child.
Note: You could also flatten the column. Its only required if using the
hierarchy for OTBI reports, but if you just want to flatten rows and columns for
all your hierarchies, it will not hurt anything.
6. Click the Online Flattening button.
7. Select the OK button to acknowledge the successful completion message.
8. Click Done.
9. Select your tree version and click Actions > Set Status > Active to activate the
tree.
10. Click OK > Done.
11. Repeat steps 1 5 for the Current hierarchy version.

44

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

For Future Reference: How to Create an Account Hierarchy Manually


Create a Tree (Hierarchy)
1. From your implementation project, expand Financials > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures for
Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart Of
Accounts
2. For Manage Account Hierarchies task, select the Go to Task icon.
Use the Manage Account Hierarchies page to search, create, and edit
account hierarchies.
3. Click the Create Tree icon to open the definition of the tree.
This opens the Manage Account Hierarchies: Specify Definition page to
define the basic details of the tree.
4. Enter the Name and Code fields: XXFin_Tree. (No Spaces).
NOTE: Tree names and Tree Version names cannot be more than 30
characters. It will cause problems when inquiring on GL balances.
5. Select the Tree Structure: Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy.
6. Enter the Description for the tree: XX Financial Tree.
7. In the Data Source Parameters, expand the Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy
Detail Values and Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Parent Values rows.
Note: For the Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Detail Values, how you read it is
select the Value Set Code for a value set where the summary flag is N (No).
Then on the Parent Values, you read it as select the Value Set Code for a
value set where the summary flag is Y (Yes).
8. In the Bind_ValueSetCode field, enter the exact name of your value set (Your
initialsAccount) for both Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Detail Values and
Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Parent Values.
9. VERY IMPORANT!!! Click the Save button on the Data Source Parameters
tables tool bar in the middle of the page. (You will get an error message if you
select Next before saving).
10. Click Next > Next.
11. Click Submit and Add Version to save your newly created tree structure and
immediately create a version.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

45

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Create a Tree Version


1. Enter the Name and Description for the tree version XXFin_Tree_Current.
NOTE: Best practice is to have a Current and Baseline version of your tree. Create
the Current version first and then duplicate it and name it Baseline later.
NOTE: Tree names and Tree Version names cannot be more than 30 characters.
2. Enter the Effective Start Date: 1/1/12 in the date format suggested in the UI.
3. Click the Next button.
4. Click the OK button to acknowledge the confirmation of the creation of a new
blank tree version.
5. Click the Add (Green + icon).
6. In Tree Node Type Specific value, select the Data Source: Accounting
Flexfield Hierarchy Parent Values.
7. Select the T Parent Node. This is the top most root node. You want to work from
the top down. Then move it to the right column. Click OK.
8. Select the T row and click the Add icon to start building your hierarchy.

9. Select Accounting Flexfield Hierarchy Parent Values.


10. Select all the next level parent values, and move them to the right. (This would
be 1000, 2000, and 3000.)
11. Click OK.
12. In Tree Node Type Specific value, select the Data Source: Accounting
Flexfield Hierarchy Detail Values. Expand 0000. Now keep building your
hierarchy levels by child values where needed. (For example, select 1000, click
the green + and add detail values 1110 and 1210.)
13. Click the Expand button on the Parent nodes to see the children.
Your hierarchy should look like this:

46

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

14. Click the Submit button, then click OK to the message informing you the tree
version was successful.
Complete the Account Hierarchy
1. Highlight your tree version. (Note: You need to expand your tree to select the
VERSION.)
2. Click the Actions > Audit.
3. Click Online Audit to start the Audit process. Once the audit is performed, the
status of the tree version can be set to active.
4. Click OK > Done.
5. Select your tree version and click Actions > Flatten> Row Flattening.
Row flattening optimizes parent-child information for run-time performance by
storing an additional column in a table for all parents of a child.
Note: You could also flatten the column. Its only required if using the
hierarchy for OTBI reports, but if you just want to flatten rows and columns for
all your hierarchies, it will not hurt anything.
6. Click the Online Flattening button.
7. Select the OK button to acknowledge the successful completion message.
8. Click Done.
9. Select your tree version and click Actions > Set Status > Active to activate the
tree.
10. Click OK > Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

47

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Publishing Accounting Hierarchy


(Only required for reporting and allocations hierarchies to create the hierarchy in
Essbase.)
1. For the next task, Publish Account Hierarchies, select the Go to Task icon.
2. Search for your tree version using your Chart of Accounts name, such as XX
Ledger.
3. Expand Account XX Ledger tree.
4. For Account XX Ledger Current version, scroll all the way to the right and
check the Publish check box.
5. Select the Publish button if not already checked.
6. Do the same steps for Account XX Ledger Base version.
7. Click OK > Save and Close.
Make sure the processes complete successfully by going to Navigator > Tools >
Scheduled Processes.

48

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

For Future Reference: How to Create a Duplicate of Account


Hierarchies for Reporting and Allocations
If your company uses hierarchies in reports and allocations, be sure you create a
duplicate of the hierarchy. You must also audit, flatten, and publish this copied
hierarchy. This is very important to reduce maintenance overhead of reports and
allocations going forward when a new hierarchy version is later created.
It is recommended you name the current version CURRENT and the copy BASELINE. If
creating hierarchies using the Rapid Implementation spreadsheet, then two hierarchy
versions will be automatically created for you.
Please see this white paper on why you need two hierarchy versions:
https://beehiveonline.oracle.com/content/dav/Oracle/Fusion_ERP_Partner_Implementat
ion_Training_Workspace/Documents/Financials/Implementation%20Training%20for%2
0Release%208/Best%20Practice%20White%20Papers%20and%20Trouble%20Shootin
g/General%20Ledger/GL_HierarchiesWhitePaper.pdf for more information.
Create a Copy of an Existing Tree (Hierarchy)
1. From your implementation project, expand Financials > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures
for Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart Of
Accounts
2. For Manage Account Hierarchies task, select the Go to Task icon.
3. Expand XXFin_Tree.
4. Highlight the row for XXFin_Tree_Current and select Actions > Duplicate.
5. Enter a Duplicate Tree Name: XXFin_Tree_Baseline and click Save and
Close > OK.
6. Highlight your XXFin_Tree_Baseline tree version and edit it. (The Effective
Start and End Dates cannot overlap with the current version.)
7. Change the Effective Start Date and End Dates to be before the Current
version, such as 1/1/11 12/31/11. Click Next > Submit > OK.
8. Highlight your XXFin_Tree_Baseline, click the Actions > Audit.
9. Click Online Audit.
10. Click OK > Done.
11. Highlight your XXFin_Tree_Baseline and select Actions > Flatten> Row
Flattening.
12. Click the Online Flattening button.
13. Select the OK > Done.
14. Select your Baseline tree version and click Actions > Set Status > Active to
activate the tree.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

49

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


15. Click OK > Done.

50

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Create an Account Combination Activity


NOTE: At the time of publishing this guide, this UI is not working. Skip this Activity.
Background
Account combinations contain a completed set of segment values that uniquely
identifies an account in the chart of accounts.
From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration > Define Enterprise Structures for Financials > Define Financial
Reporting Structures > Define Chart of Accounts
1. For Manage Account Combinations, select Go to Task.
2. Search by your Chart of Accounts, XX Ledger.
3. Click the Add Row icon.
4. Verify that the Enabled check box is checked.
5. Enter 3100-000-17820-3100 or any other combination you like.
6. Optionally enter a From Date, To Date and an Alternate Account.
7. Click the Save and Close button.
Note: If you enabled Dynamic combination creation allowed for your chart of
account instances, you do not need to manually create account combinations.
The system will automatically create them for you during setup, transaction and
journal entry.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

51

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Define Cross-Validation Rules Demonstration


Background
Create cross-validation rules to prevent specific combinations of segment values in your
account combinations, for example, preventing a particular cost center from being
combined with a specific company value. Cross validation rules only affect the creation
of new account combinations.
Activity Scope
Enter a new cross validation rule to prevent your Company value 3100 from being
combined with your marketing cost center values 220 and 221 because Company 3100
does not have a marketing cost center.
1. From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration > Define Enterprise Structures for Financials > Define
Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart of Accounts
2. For the Manage Cross-Validation Rules task, select Go to Task.
3. Select your Chart of Accounts, XX Ledger.
4. Click the Add Row icon.
5. Specify a unique rule Name, NOMARKETING3100 an optional Description: Do
not combine Company 3100 with Cost Center 220 and 221.
6. Enter an optional effective From Date of today.
7. Check Enabled.
8. On the Condition Filter, click on the Change filter condition icon. Select Add
Fields > Company. Enter Company Equals 3100. The cross validation rule
evaluates if Company 3100 was entered and if it is the defined value, then, the
validation process continues to evaluate the rule. Note: If you do not specify any
statement in the condition filter, then the rule is always evaluated.
9. Click OK.
10. On the Validation Filter, click on the Change filter condition icon. Select Add
Fields > Cost Center
11. Select Cost Center is Not Between 219-222. Click OK. When the rule is
evaluated, an account combination must contain a cost center other than 220 for
company 3100 before it can be created.
12. Enter an Error Message: Company 3100 does not have a marketing department
in Canada, select a different cost center. The message displays in the relevant

52

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


user interfaces and processes when an account combination cannot be created
because it violates the rule.
13. Click Save and Close.

Test:
1. Navigate > Manage Account Combinations task from within your
implementation project > Go to Task icon.
2. Select your Chart of Accounts, XX Ledger.
3. Click the Add Row icon.
4. Enter 3100-220-17820-3100.
5. Save. The error message appears.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

53

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Define Cross-Validation Rules Activity


Activity Scope
Enter a new cross validation rule to prevent balance sheet accounts from using any
other cost centers besides 000 and 110.
1. From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration > Define Enterprise Structures for Financials > Define
Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart of Accounts
2. For Manage Cross-Validation Rules, select Go to Task.
3. Select your chart of accounts.
4. Click the Add Row icon.
5. Specify a Name: Cost Center 000 and 110 and Description: Balance Sheet
Accounts can only be combined with Cost Centers 000 and 110.
6. Check Enabled.
7. For the Condition Filter, select the filter icon and select Add Fields and select
Account.
8. Enter Accounts Between 10000 39999, and click OK.
9. For the Validation Filter, enter two rows for Cost Center Equals 000 and Cost
Center Equals 110, and click OK.

10. Enter Error Message: Use Cost Center 000 or 110 with balance sheet
accounts.
11. Click Save and Close.

54

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


Test:
Note: Because the Account Combinations UI is broken in this env., skip this step.
1. Navigate > Manage Account Combinations task from within your
implementation project > Go to Task icon.
2. Select your Chart of Accounts.
3. Click the Add Row icon.
4. Enter 3100-220-11010-3100.
5. Save. The error message appears.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

55

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View Accounting Calendar Activity


Activity Scope
View the accounting calendar system generated when you uploaded the information
from your Rapid Implementation spreadsheet.
1. From within your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures for
Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Calendars >
Manage Accounting Calendars > Go to Task.
2. Use the Manage Accounting Calendar page to create and edit calendars.
3. Search for your XX Ledger calendar.
4. Click Edit.
5. Review the periods.
6. Click the Add Year button to add year 2015. Note: You can only add one year at
a time between saves.
7. Click Save and Close button.
8. Click the Done button.
9. You have successfully updated your accounting calendar.

56

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

For Future Reference: Create Calendar Manually Activity


Activity Scope
Create a new accounting calendar for three years starting January 1, 2013 and ending
December 31st each with one adjusting period at the end of the year.
1. From within your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials > Define Enterprise Structures for
Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Calendars >
Manage Accounting Calendars > Go to Task.
2. Use the Manage Accounting Calendar page to create and edit calendars.
3. Click the Create button.
4. Enter the desired information into the Name and Description field. Enter
XXCalendar.
5. Enter the desired information into the Start Date field. Enter 1/1/13.
6. Select Monthly in the Period Frequency field.
7. Accept the defaults in the Period Name Format.
8. Select the Once at year end list item in the Adjusting Period Frequency field.
9. Click the Next button.
10. Use the Create Accounting Calendar : Period Details to review the calendar
period data. Only year 2013 has been created.
11. Click Save and Close button.
12. Click on the name of your calendar.
13. Click the Add Year button to add year 2014. Note: You can only add one year at
a time between saves.
14. Click Save and Close button.
15. Click the Done button.
16. You have successfully created a new accounting calendar.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

57

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Create Currencies Activity

Background
Your company, Vision America Inc, has a ledger currency of United States dollars
(USD), and is doing business with suppliers in:

Canada in Canadian dollars (CAD).

Mexico in Mexican pesos (MXP).

Ultraland, a new country which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).

You also have intercompany transactions with your Vision UK Services, Ltd entity,
which uses Great Britain pounds sterling (GBP).
Activity Scope Ultraland
Verify that USD, CAD, MXP and GPS are enabled and create currency for Ultraland.
1. From your implementation, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration > Define Enterprise Structures for Financials > Define
Financial Reporting Structures > Define Currencies > Manage Currencies >
Go to Task.
2. Verifying that USD, CAD, and GBP currencies are enabled.
3. Create a new currency for Ultraland (XXULD) where XX represents your initials.
4. Click the Create icon (green +) to create a new currency.
5. Currency Code: Unique identifier used to reference the currency in user
interfaces. Enter XXULD replacing XX with your initials.
6. Currency Name: XX Ultraland Dollars.
7. Description: Currency for Ultraland.
8. Enabled: Check the enabled check box to start using the currency.
9. Start and End Dates: Used to begin or end use of a currency on a specific date.
Start Date default is the current date. Accept the default date.
10. Click Save.
11. Expand your currency and accept the defaults in the following fields:

58

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Issuing Territory: Optionally, select among predefined country names per


International Standards Organization (ISO) Standard #3166.

Symbol: Optionally, enter the symbol for the currency.

Precision: Designate the number of digits to the right of the decimal point
used in regular currency transactions. Default is 2.

Extended Precision: Designate the number of digits to the right of the


decimal point used in calculations. Default is 5. You must specify a number
greater than or equal to the number in the Precision field.

Minimum Accountable Unit: Optionally, enter the smallest denomination


used.

ISO Currency: Identify ISO currencies. Default is checked.

Type: Select Currency or Statistical to indicate how the currency is used in


transactions and journal entries. Type also determines how the balances are
shown. Default is Currency.

Derivation Type: Use only for the euro and national currencies of the
European Monetary Union (EMU) member states during the transition period.
All other currencies do not have derivation types.

Derivation Factor: Enter a fixed conversion rate by which you multiply one
euro to derive the equivalent EMU currency amount. The euro currency itself
does not have a derivation factor.

Derivation Effective Date: Enter the date on which the relationship between
the EMU currency and the euro begins.

12. Click Save and Close

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

59

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Create Conversion Rate Types Activity

Background
Your company, Vision America Inc, has a ledger currency of United States dollars
(USD), and needs different conversion rate types for your payables and receivables
transactions with Ultraland, which uses Ultraland dollars (ULD).

For receivables, use your corporate conversion rate types.

For payables, use a special corporate conversion rate type.

Activity Scope
Create a new conversion rate type for your payables transactions called XXSPCORP
(replace XX with your initials).
1. From within your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common
Applications Configuration > Define Enterprise Structures for Financials >
Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Currencies > Manage
Conversion Rate Types > Go to Task.
2. Click the Add row icon.
3. Enter Name XXSPCORP where XX are your initials. Enter Description Payables
Special Rate Type.
4. Enable Enforce Inverse Relationship and Enable Cross Rates.
5. Enter your currency XXULD as the Cross Rate Pivot Currency.
6. Add USD and CAD as the contra currencies by clicking the Add Row button in
the Contra Currencies region.
7. Click Save and Close.

60

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View a Primary Ledger Activity


Activity Scope
View the primary ledgers created by the system when you created them using the Rapid
Implementation spreadsheets.
8. From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration for Financials> Define Ledgers > Define Accounting
Configurations > Manage Primary Ledgers > Go to Task.
9. Click the Create icon in the Manage Primary Ledger page.
10. Review your XX Ledger CA and XX Ledger US ledgers that were created.
11. Click Done.
12. For the Assign Legal Entities task, select the Go To Task icon.
13. In the Select Scope popup, for the Primary Ledger field, select the Select and
Add option, then select the Apply and Go to Task button.
14. Select your XX Ledger CA and then click the Save and Close button at the very
bottom of the window.
15. In the Assign Legal Entities page, view the information. Click Save and Close.
Note: A Warning message will appear informing you to assign balancing
segment values to legal entities. This is a generic warning that always pops up.
Just click OK to the warning. You can view the balancing segment value
assignments in the task called Assign Balancing Segment Values to Legal
Entities.
16. If you have time, do the same for your other ledger.
Note: Make sure you switch the scope back to XX Ledger CA, the Canadian
ledger.
Your Primary Ledger name now appears as the Selected Scope across all
components of this Accounting Configuration. You will need to change the scope
value based on which Ledger you are defining options for.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

61

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

For Future Reference: Create a Primary Ledger Manually Activity


Activity Scope
Create a primary ledger using US Chart of Accounts, AccountingMMYY calendar,
USD as the currency, and Standard Accrual as accounting method.
1. From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration for Financials> Define Ledgers > Define Accounting
Configurations > Manage Primary Ledgers > Go to Task.
2. Click the Create icon in the Manage Primary Ledger page.
3. Enter a unique Name (No periods, commas, dashes or special characters.) and
Description: XXPrimary Ledger. Your Ledger name will appear on reports so
name it correctly.
Note: Do NOT use periods, dashes, commas or special characters in your
Ledger Name, such as ABC Co., Inc.
4. Select Chart of Accounts: US Chart of Accounts.
5. Select your Calendar: XXCalendar.
6. Select Currency: USD.
7. Select the Accounting Method: Standard Accrual.
8. Click the Save and Edit Task List button to save your primary ledger and return
to the Setup and Maintenance work area or your project plan.
9. Select Assign Legal Entities > Go To Task
10. In the Select Scope popup, for the Primary Ledger field, select the Select and
Add option, then select the Apply and Go to Task button.
11. Select your XXPrimary Ledger and then click Save and Close button at the
very bottom of the window.
12. In the Assign Legal Entities page, select the Add icon and choose your legal
entity, XX Legal Entity, then click Apply, then Done.
13. Click Save and Close.
14. Your Primary Ledger name now appears as the Selected Scope across all
components of this Accounting Configuration.

62

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Specify Ledger Options Activity

Background
Setting ledger options is one of the most important tasks in configuring your ledgers.
From your implementation project, Navigate > Financials > Define Common
Applications Configuration for Financials> Define Ledgers > Define Accounting
Configurations >
1. Specify Ledger Options > Go to Task.
Note: Make sure your scope value is your XX Ledger CA, the Canadian ledger.
Accounting Calendar Options
2. Review the Accounting Calendar that defaults from your ledger.
3. Select Jan-13 as the First Opened Period for your ledger.
4. Enter 3 for the Number of Future Enterable Periods.
Subledger Accounting Options
5. Review the Accounting Method from your ledger.
6. Select American English as your Journal Language.
Period Close Options
1. Review Retained Earnings Account: 4888-000-31010-4888
Note that the above value is derived from the mapping provided earlier in the
Rapid Implementation spreadsheet.
2. Enter Cumulative Translation Adjustment Account: 4888-000-31040-4888
Enable the following Entry options:
3. Enable journal approval.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

63

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


Click OK to the warning message
4. Notify when prior period journal is entered.
5. Allow mixed statistical and monetary journals.
6. Validate reference date.
7. Separate journals by accounting date during journal import.
For Reversal options:
8. Leave blank. You can select any predefined criteria set from the list of values in
the Journal Reversal Criteria Set at any time.
9. Uncheck Run AutoReverse after open period. You can return to this page and
enable this option later.
10. For Intercompany options: Click the Enable intercompany accounting.
11. For Average Balance Options: Do not enable average daily balance (ADB)
processing.
Note: Disabling the ADB option will hide this region when you later update the
ledger options.
For Sequencing options:
12. Review the sequencing options selected based on the selections in the GL Rapid
Implementation spreadsheet.
13. Enable No sequencing.
14. Click Save and Close to return to your implementation project.
Optionally, you could assign balancing segment values to ledgers and assign
reporting currencies and secondary ledgers.

64

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Review and Submit Accounting Configuration


1. For the Review and Submit Accounting Configuration task, click the Go to
Task icon.
2. Click Submit to create your accounting configuration. This will automatically
create a Data Access Set with full read and write access to your primary ledger.
The system automatically generates data roles for every data access set.
3. Verify Data Role Generation for Ledgers > Go to Task
4. Click the Search - Role Templates link.
5. In the Display Name, enter General Ledger Template for Ledger.
6. Click Search
7. Click Actions > Open
8. Click Generate Roles button
9. Click the Summary tab and expand Valid Roles. You should see your General
Ledger data roles that are appended with your ledger name. You assign
these data roles to your users to access those ledgers.
10. Close the Entitlements Server (a.k.a Authorization Policy Manager (APM))
window.
11. Provision Roles to Implementation Users > Go to Task.
This opens Oracle Identity Manager (OIM).
12. Click the Administration link.
13. Search for your user.
14. Click the Roles tab, and click the Assign icon and assign one of the GL data
roles you just created, such as General Accounting Manager XX Primary
Ledger.
Note: You can search by wildcards, such as %XX% and then multi-select
15. Close OIM.
16. The next step is to open the period. Do not open the period for this exercise.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

65

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Reporting Currencies Activity


Background
A reporting currency is another ledger that differs in currency and is linked to a primary
or secondary ledger. Reporting currencies are maintained at one of three data
conversion levels: Balance level for balance level translation to a different currency,
Journal level for converting all GL journals to another currency, and Subledger level that
converts all subledger transactions and any manual journals to a different currency.
Activity Scope
You will define a USD Journal level reporting currency for your Canadian ledger, XX
Ledger CA.
1. From your implementation project, Financials > Define Common Applications
Configuration for Financials > Define Ledgers > Define Accounting
Configurations
2. Make sure your Selected Scope is set to XX Ledger CA, your Canadian ledger.
3. Manage Reporting Currencies > Go to Task.
4. Click the Create icon.
5. Name and Description: Enter XX USD Reporting Currency.
6. Currency Conversion Level: Select Journal.
7. Currency: Enter USD.
In the Ledger Options region.
8. First Open Period: Enter Jan-13.
9. Rounding Account: 4888-222-60044-4888.
10. Revaluation Basis: Select Entered currency instead of Primary ledger currency.
11. Enable journal approval: Uncheck check box.
In the Currency Translation Options region
12. Default Conversion Rate Type: Corporate.
13. Retain Transaction Rate Type: Yes
14. In the Error Handling region: Missing Conversion Rate: Click Use last rate
15. For the Number of Days to Find Last Rate: 5
66

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


Journal Conversion Rules:
16. Retain Journal Creator from Source Ledger: Yes.
17. Review the following:

Journal Source: Other.

Journal Category: Other.

Convert Journals to this Reporting Currency: Yes.

Data Conversion
Leave all the defaults. This section applies to converting historical data.
Sequencing
18. Leave the default of No sequencing.
19. Click Save and Close twice.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

67

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Create a Ledger Set Activity

Background
Ledger Sets enable you to group multiple ledgers that share the same chart of accounts
and calendar combination in order to perform processes across multiple ledgers at
once.
Activity Scope
Create a ledger set using your US, Canada and USD Reporting Currency Ledger. This
allows you to perform processes, such as opening and closing periods, across multiple
ledgers at once.
1. From within your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common
Applications Configuration > Define General Ledger Options > Manage
Ledger Sets > Go to Task.
2. Click the Create icon. Enter Name and Description: XX Set
3. Select your Chart of Accounts: XX Ledger.
4. Select your Calendar: XX Ledger US.
5. Default Ledger: XX Ledger US.
In the ledger Set Assignments table, click the Add icon (green +). Add the following
three ledgers:

XX Ledger US

XX Ledger CA

XX USD Reporting Currency

6. Click Save and Close > Done.

68

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

View Data Access Set Activity


Background
Data Access Sets are used to control access to specific ledgers, ledgers sets, or
primary balancing segments of ledgers.
Activity Scope
Once you submit the Accounting Configuration, a Data Access Set is automatically
created with full read/write access to the Primary Ledgers. You will review the data
access sets system generated for you.
1. From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration for Financials > Define Security for Financials > Define Data
Security for Financials > Manage Data Access Sets > Go to Task.
2. You should see four Data Access Sets, assuming you created a journal level
reporting currency and a ledger set. You should see something like the following:

3. Feel free to open each one to view the properties.


4. When finished, click Cancel > Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

69

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Create Data Access Set Activity


Background
Data Access Sets are used to control read and write access to specific ledgers, ledger
sets, or primary balancing segments of ledgers.
Activity Scope
Once you submit the Accounting Configuration, a Data Access Set is automatically
created with full read/write access to the Primary Ledger. You only need to create a
Data Access Set to grant more granular access to specific balancing segment values or
alter the read and write privileges or grant access to multiple ledgers.
1. From your implementation project, Navigate > Define Common Applications
Configuration for Financials > Define Security for Financials > Define Data
Security for Financials > Manage Data Access Sets > Go to Task.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter unique Name and Description: XX BSV Data Access Set, replacing XX
with your initials or number.
4. Select the Access Set Type: Primary Balancing Segment Value.
5. Select your Chart of Accounts: XX Ledger.
6. Select your Accounting Calendar: XX Ledger.
7. Select the Default Ledger: XX Ledger US.
8. Click the Add icon in the Access Set Assignments.
9. Enter your Ledger: XX Ledger US.
10. Clear the All Values check box.
11. In the Specific Value field: select Single Value, Segment Value 3111, Privilege
Read and Write.
Note: If you select Parent Value to represent a group of balancing segments,
then you must select a Tree Code to indicate the source of the hierarchy
information, a Tree Version Name, and the primary balancing Segment Value.
Note: You will ONLY be able to select the Tree Code that is assigned to
your Primary Balancing Segment of your Chart of Accounts Instance.
You assign the Tree Code in the Chart of Accounts Instances UI.
12. Continue to add rows to include more than one primary balancing segment value,
if needed. You will never use this data access set for future exercises.
13. Click Save and Close.

70

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Segment Value Security Demonstration


Background
Enabling Segment Value Security controls what segment values users can see and use
throughout the transaction and GL UIs.
Functionally, defining and enabling such rules consists of several steps:
1) Enabling Segment Value Security at the value set level
2) Creating a Data Security Condition
3) Creating a Data Security Policy
Before proceeding with these steps, confirm in OIM what roles (as part of the data roles
created for each ledger for the respective chart of accounts) are assigned to the users
who will be using these ledgers. This is important because as part of the definition of
security policies you need to specify what roles are impacted by the policies.
From within your implementation project navigate to
Define Common Applications Configuration > Define Implementation Users >
Create Implementation Users > Go to Task.
This opens Identity Manager.
1. Click on the Administration link on the top right hand corner of the main page.
2. Search for your user at the top left corner and click on the Display Name.
3. From the Roles tab, expand the General Accounting Manager XX Ledger role
and note it is based on the General Accounting Manager Job Role for the XX
Ledger Data Access Set.
In case you plan to use tree operators in your policy definitions, review your tree
definitions and make sure they are properly set up for the desired security behavior.
Activity Scope

Enable security for XX Account value set associated with your chart of accounts.

Provide the General Accounting Manager XX Ledger data role with access to
a range of account values.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

71

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger

Deny all other users access to all account value set values.

I. Enable Segment Value Security at the value set level.


From within your implementation project navigate to
Define Common Applications Configuration > Define Enterprise Structures for
Financials > Define Financial Reporting Structures > Define Chart of Accounts >
Manage Segment Value Security Rules > Go to Task.
1. Search for Value Set Code Account XX Ledger and click on Edit.
2. Check the Security enabled checkbox, enter XX_Security_resource in the
data security resource name and save your changes.
3. Click on Edit Data Security button to proceed with defining a security condition
and policy.
Note: This UI requires you to Save first before the Edit Data Security button is
enabled.
II. Create a Data Security Condition.
1. With the Condition tab selected, click the Create button to begin creating the
policy.
2. For both the Name and Displayed Name fields, enter XXRestricted Access.
3. In the Conditions section, click Add.
4. Select Column Name: VALUE, Operator: Between, Value: 10000-79999.
You can use either tree or non-tree operators.
The following non-tree operators are supported:
-

Equal to

Not Equal to

Between

Not Between.

Similarly, the following tree operators are supported:


-

Is a last descendent of

Is a descendent of.

5. Once you have finished defining the desired conditions, click Save.
III. Create a Data Security Policy.
1. When you are on the Policy tab, click on the Create button to begin creating a
new policy. Begin by specifying information in the General Information tab.

72

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Oracle Fusion General Ledger


2. Enter a Name and Start Date.
3. Click the Role tab and search for the relevant data role that you desire to be
affected by this policy.
(Note that the search functionality for roles in the Select and Add popup does
not work very well, i.e. it does not like wildcard characters.)
4. Search for GENERAL_ACCOUNTING_MANAGER_JOB_XX Ledger role.
5. Once the desired role shows up in the Role tab, click on the Rule tab in order to
associate the condition with the policy.
6. The Row Set field determines what range of value set values are affected by the
policy. Select Multiple Values.
7. Select your XXRestricted Access condition that was defined earlier.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Click the Submit button.
10. Deploy your chart of accounts. (You can do this from the following UIs, such as
Manage Chart of Accounts Structures and Manage Chart of Accounts
Structure Instances.)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

73

Lesson 5: Allocations

Lesson 5:

Allocations

Lesson 5: Allocations Activities


The following are activities and demonstrations for Enterprise Structures:
1.

Create an Allocation Rule

2.

Generate an Allocation

-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_To Participants:


You do not need to perform the steps in Create an Allocation Rule Activity.
The allocation is already defined in the system. You only need to review this
section to understand the allocation, and then perform the steps in the sections
Copy Allocations Activity and Generate Allocations Activity.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-

Create an Allocation Rule Activity


NOTE: In this section of the Activity Guide, you will use the demo data we have
provided since subledger applications have already been defined for you.
You will be working in the Data Access Set: US Primary Ledger.
Background
In this activity you will create an allocation rule to perform allocations and redistribute
amounts. Freight that was not originally posted to a product will be redistributed to
products based on product revenue. Freight has been posted to account 62510, cost
center 510, product 000. Revenue has been posted to account 41000, by product (all
Cost Centers).
A run time prompt will be used to specify the accounting period when the allocation is
run.
Activity Scope

Create, validate, and deploy an allocation rule in Allocation Manager.

Perform the following tasks:

74

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Change your Data Access Set to US Primary Ledger and click OK.

3. Select Create Allocation Rules from the Tasks menu. This opens the Enterprise
Management System Workspace, Fusion Edition to access Calculation Manager.
Here you can create, validate, deploy, and administer allocation Rules and
RuleSets.
4. Click Navigate >Administer> Calculation Manager

Use the System View tab to view and edit existing rules and rule sets and to
create new ones.
5. Click the Expand icon on Essbase > US Chart of Accounts > db.
6. Right-click on Rules > New.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

75

Lesson 5: Allocations
Use the New Rule window to enter a Rule Name, Application Type, Application,
and Database for the Allocation Rule.
7. Enter the following:

Name: XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev (replacing


XX with your initials).

Leave the defaults for Application Type, Application, and Database,


and then click OK.

Notice that a new tab has opened to define the Rule, XXAllocation of Freight
based on Product Rev.
The Properties tab (lower pane) is used to define the properties of the current
node in the Rule Designer.
8. Enter Description: Allocate Freight Expenses to Products based on Product
Revenue.
9. In the Rule Palette pane (top left) select the Point of View object. Drag the
Point of View object to the Rule Designer pane between the Begin and End
nodes by pressing the left mouse button.

76

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations

Enter Your Point of View to Specify Default Values for the Current Object
10. Click on the Properties tab, the first tab.

11. For the Caption field, enter POV.


We will use a POV Variable that has already been defined.
12. Click on the Point of View tab, click the Variable Selector icon.
13. Change Category: to Database.
14. Select the Variable named POV and click OK.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

77

Lesson 5: Allocations

The values you see entered for each Dimension were defined in the Variable.
This is a time saving, efficient way to enter commonly used allocation
Dimensions.
In this allocation, we will use the Product in the Allocation Range, so we dont
want the Product specified on the POV.
15. Highlight the Value for the Product Dimension and delete it so that it is blank.
You will receive a message that says: Editing the grid will remove the dynamic
variable linking. Are you sure you want to continue Click Yes before you delete
the value.
Enter Your Allocation Object
16. Drag the Allocation object from the Rule Palette pane to the Rule Designer
pane between the PO and Member Selector by pressing the left mouse button.
Use the Allocate Wizard pop up to select the dimension variables and members
to define the Allocation Rule. You will select a Variable for the Accounting Period.
The Accounting Period will be specified by you when you execute the allocation.
17. For Accounting Period, click inside the Select Value field. Click the Actions icon
to the far right in that field, and select Variable.
18. Change the Category: to Database using the drop down list.
19. Select the Accounting_Period Variable, then click OK.
20. The rest of the Dimensions will be specified in the next steps. Click the Next
button.
78

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
Enter Source Information
21. For Account, click inside the Select Value field. Click Actions icon and select
Member.
22. Expand Account and All Account Values.

23. Select 62510.


24. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
25. Repeat steps 25-29 for the Cost Center, Product, Intercompany, and Balance
Amount dimensions. Choose the following for each:

Cost Center: 510

Product: 000

Intercompany: 000

Balance Amount: Ending Balance

26. Accept the other defaults.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

79

Lesson 5: Allocations

27. Click Next.


Enter Allocation Range
The Allocation Range will be used to calculate the percentages of the basis.
28. For the Product, click inside the Select Value field.
29. Click the Actions icon > Member.
30. Expand Product and All Corporate Products-V1.
31. Select T.
32. Click the Right Arrow icon and click OK.
33. Click Next.
Enter Target
34. Click the Member Selector button (another way to enter member values)

80

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations

35. In the Dimensions drop down, select Account.

36. Expand Account and All Account Values.


37. Select 62510.
38. Click the Right Arrow icon.
39. Repeat steps 40 43 for the Cost Center and Intercompany Dimensions
specifying the following values for each simply by changing the drop downs for
each:
o Cost Center: 510
o Intercompany: 000.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

81

Lesson 5: Allocations

40. Click OK
41. Click Next.
Enter Offset
42. Click the Member Selector button
43. In the Dimensions drop down, select Account.
44. Expand Account and All Account Values.
45. Select 62510.
46. Click the Right Arrow icon.
47. Repeat steps 47-51 for the Cost Center, Product, and Intercompany
dimensions using the following values:

Cost Center: 510.

Product: 000

Intercompany: 000

48. Click OK.


49. Click Next.
Skip Exclude.
50. Click Next.
Enter Basis
51. Click the drop down arrow on Select an allocation method.
52. Select Allocate using a basis.
82

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
53. For AccountingPeriod, click inside the Select Value field.
54. Click the Actions icon.
55. Select Variable.
56. Change the Category to Database.
57. Select Variable of Accounting_Period.
58. Click OK.
You can define multiple Variables for each Dimension. You may want to use a
different Accounting Period for the Basis than you use for the Source. In this
example we will use the same Accounting Period for the Basis and Source, it will
be specified as a Run Time Variable.
59. For Account, click inside the Select Value field.
60. Click the Actions icon.
61. Select Member.
62. Expand Account and All Account Values.
63. Select 41000.
64. Click the Right Arrow icon and click OK.
65. Repeat steps 64-69 for the Cost Center, Intercompany, Scenario, Balance
Amount, and Amount Type dimensions by specifying the following values:

Cost Center: Expand All Corporate Cost Center-V1, and select T.

Intercompany: 000

Scenario: Actual

Balance Amount: Ending Balance

Amount Type: PTD

66. Accept the other defaults.


67. Click Next.
Enter Basis - Options
68. Accept the defaults for the Basis-Options.
69. Click Next.
Enter Rounding
70. Accept the defaults for Rounding.
71. Click Save.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

83

Lesson 5: Allocations
72. Click Finish.
73. Click File> Save to save the rule.
74. Click OK to the Information message.
Validate and Deploy
75. Click Actions > Validate > Essbase
76. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the
menus.

77. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.


Note: Successfully defining an allocation rule does not guarantee that
allocation journals will be created when the rule is generated. The success
depends on if there are balances in the accounts.
FYI
Viewing and Defining Variables
1. You can choose Tools> Variables.
2. In the Variable Navigator pane, expand Essbase.
3. Expand USChartofAccounts
4. Click on db, the Variables will appear in the right pane.
5. To View the Variable definition, select the Variable.
6. To add a new Variable, right click on db and select New.

84

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations

Copy Allocations Activity


Background
We will make a copy of the Allocation of Freight based on Product Rev rule and
rename with your initials for easier identification.
Activity Scope

Copy an allocation

Copy your allocations.


1. Find the Allocation of Freight based on Product Rev rule in the EPM
Workspace.
2. Highlight the rule, right click, and select Copy To.
3. In the window that opens, add your initials to the beginning of the name (i.e.
XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev). Click OK.
4. Your allocation will appear in the list of allocation rules. Double-click on your
allocation rule.
5. Click Actions > Validate.
6. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the
menus.

7. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.


Note: Successfully defining an allocation rule does not guarantee that
allocation journals will be created when the rule is generated. The success
depends on if there are balances in the accounts.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

85

Lesson 5: Allocations

Generate Allocations Activity


Background
You have created an allocation rule and now you are ready to process it and create a
General Ledger journal with the results.
Activity Scope

Generate an allocation

Verify Process completion

Review Journal

Generate your allocations.


1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Click the Generate General Ledger Allocations link.
Use the Generate Allocations page to generate and post allocations.
3. Click the Rule or Rule Set list. Select the allocation rule you defined,
XXAllocation of Freight based on Product Rev.
4. Click the Specify Accounting Period list. Select Period 01-14
Note: The Accounting Period is the Run Time Prompt you specified.
5. Clear the Post Allocations checkbox.
6. Click the Submit button.
7. Note the Request #.
8. Click the OK button.
Verify the Allocation Process completes
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals to check the status of the
Processes.
The Journals work area has a Process Monitor region at the bottom.
2. In the Process Monitor widget, Select Status All and Time Range Last 1 hour.
3. You should see 3 sequential processes, beginning with the Request # you noted
when submitting. Generate Allocations, Execute Allocations and Write Back

86

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
Results, and Import Journals: Child. The status for each should be
Succeeded. If the processes havent yet completed, use the refresh icon to
refresh the search results.
Review Journal
1. Click the Manage Journals task.
2. In the Search criteria, Journal Starts with XX (the initials you used to name
your allocation). Source Equals Allocations. Click the Search button.
3. Your journal will appear in the search results. Click on the journal to open and
review it.
You have successfully generated allocations.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

87

Lesson 5: Allocations

Create an Intercompany Allocation Rule Activity

Background
In this activity you will create an intercompany allocation rule to perform intercompany
allocations and redistribute amounts.
A run time prompt will be used to specify the accounting period when the intercompany
allocation is run.
Activity Scope

Create, validate, and deploy an allocation rule in Calculation Manager.

Perform the following tasks:


1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Change your Data Access Set to US Primary Ledger and click OK.
3. Select Create Allocation Rules from the Tasks menu. This opens the Enterprise
Management System Workspace, Fusion Edition to access Calculation Manager.
Here you can create, validate, deploy, and administer allocation Rules and
RuleSets.
4. Navigate >Administer> Calculation Manager
Use the System View tab to view and edit existing rules and rule sets and to create
new ones.
5. Click the Expand icon on Essbase > US Chart of Accounts > db.
6. Right-click on Rules > New.
Use the New Rule window to enter a Rule Name, Application Type, Application,
and Database for the Allocation Rule.
7. Enter the following:

88

Name: XXIntercompany Allocations IC to GL Flow (replacing


XX with your initials).

Leave the defaults for Application Type, Application, and Database,


and then click OK.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
Notice that a new tab has opened to define the Rule, XXIntercompany
Allocations IC to GL Flow.
8. The Properties tab (lower pane) is used to define the properties of the current
node in the Rule Designer. Enter Description: Allocate Intercompany
Expenses.
9. In the Rule Palette pane (top left) select the Point of View object. Drag the
Point of View object to the Rule Designer pane between the Begin and End
nodes by pressing the left mouse button.

Enter Your Point of View to Specify Default Values for the Current Object
10. Click on the Properties tab.
11. For the Caption field, enter POV.
12. We will use a Accounting_Period Variable that has already been defined. Click
on the Accounting Period Dimension in the POV select variable.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

89

Lesson 5: Allocations

13. Change Category: to Database.


14. Select the Variable named Accounting_Period and click OK

15. Click on the Member selector Icon.

90

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
16. Select the Ledger Dimension from Dimensions choice list.
17. Expand Ledger and All Ledgers

18. Select value US Primary Ledger.


19. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
20. Now for each dimension select the specific member value for the specified
dimensions as shown below:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

91

Lesson 5: Allocations

Enter Your Formula Object

21. Drag the Formula object from the Rule Palette pane to the Rule Designer pane
by pressing the left mouse button in between the POV start and end node.
22. Click on the Properties tab.
23. For the Caption field, enter Formula.
24. Click on the Formula tab.

92

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
25. On the right hand side of the = sign enter 10000
26. On the left hand side of the = sign click inside the Select Value field to invoke
member selector.
27. Select Account Dimension from the Dimensions choice list in the top.
28. Expand Account and All Account Values.

29. Select value 11103.


30. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
31. Now select Company Dimension from the Dimensions choice list in the top.
32. Expand Company and All Company Values.
33. Select value 102.
34. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
35. Press OK for the member selector.
36. Now click on the second row in the formula component.
37. On the right hand side of the = sign enter amount -10000 (minus 10000)
38. On the left hand side of the = sign click inside the Select Value field to invoke
member selector.
39. Select Account Dimension from the Dimensions choice list in the top.
40. Expand Account and All Account Values.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

93

Lesson 5: Allocations

41. Select value 11200.


42. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
43. Now select Company Dimension from the Dimensions choice list in the top.
44. Expand Company and All Company Values.
45. Select value 101.
46. Click Right Arrow icon and click OK.
47. Press OK for the member selector.
Validate and Deploy
48. Click Actions > Validate.
49. Click Actions > Deploy.
Validate and Deploy can also be done using the last icon beneath the
menus.

94

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations

50. Click OK on Information message The Deployment was successful.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

95

Lesson 5: Allocations

Generate your Intercompany Allocation Journals


1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Click the Generate General Ledger Allocations link.
Use the Generate Allocations page to generate and post allocations.
3. Click the Rule or Rule Set list. Select the allocation rule you defined,
XXIntercompany Allocations IC to GL Flow.
4. Click the Specify Accounting Period list. Select Period 10-14
Note: The Accounting Period is the Run Time Prompt you specified.
5. Check the Post Allocations checkbox.
6. Click the Submit button.
7. Note the Request #.
8. Click the OK button.
Verify the Allocation Process completes
9. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals to check the status of the
Processes.
The Journals work area has a Process Monitor region at the bottom.
10. In the Process Monitor widget, Select Status All and Time Range Last 1 hour.
11. You should see 3 sequential processes, beginning with the Request # you noted
when submitting. Generate Allocations, Allocate General Ledger Balances,
Import Journals: Child and Post Allocation Journals. The status for each
should be succeeded. If the processes havent yet completed, use the refresh
icon to refresh the search results.
Review Journal
12. Click the Manage Journals task.
13. In the Search criteria, Journal Starts with XX (the initials you used to name
your allocation). Source Equals Allocations. Click the Search button.
14. Your journal will appear in the search results. Click on the journal to open and
review it. Review the intercompany lines added to the journal.
Note: The allocation is within a single ledger and is balanced during
posting by Intercompany, using intercompany balancing rules.

96

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Allocations
You have successfully generated general ledger allocation journals.

Generate your Intercompany Allocation Transactions


1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Click the Generate Intercompany Allocations link.
Use the Generate Intercompany Allocations page to generate and submit
allocations.

3. Click the Rule or Rule Set list. Select the allocation rule you defined,
XXIntercompany Allocations IC to GL Flow.
4. Click the Specify Accounting Period list. Select Period 10-14
Note: The Accounting Period is the Run Time Prompt you specified.
5. Click the Intercompany Transaction Type list. Select I/C Adjustment.
6. Click the Submit button.
7. Note the Request #.
8. Click the OK button.
Verify the Allocation Process completes
9. Navigator > Intercompany Accounting > Transactions > Intercompany
Reconciliation task to check the status of the Processes.
The Reconciliation work area has a Process Monitor region at the bottom.
10. In the Process Monitor widget, Select Status All and Time Range Last 1 hour.
11. You should see 3 sequential processes, beginning with the Request # you noted
when submitting. Generate Intercompany Allocations, Allocate General
Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

97

Lesson 5: Allocations
Ledger Balances, Generate Intercompany Allocation Transactions, and
Import Intercompany Transactions. The status for each should be succeeded.
If the processes havent yet completed, use the refresh icon to refresh the search
results.
Review Intercompany Batch
1. Click the Manage Intercompany Outbound Transactions task.
2. In the Search criteria, select Batch Status Submitted. Click the Search button.
3. Your batch will appear in the search results. To open and review it click on the
batch number with transaction type I/C Adjustment and description containing
the name of your allocation. Review the intercompany batch.
Note: If you want to create AP/AR invoices for your intercompany allocation, choose a
transaction type that has invoicing enabled in step 5 when selecting the Intercompany
Transaction Type submission parameter.
You have successfully generated intercompany allocation transactions.

98

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Lesson 6:

Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Subledger Accounting Overview

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

99

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Subledger Accounting Activities


The following activities and demonstrations are for Oracle Fusion Subledger
Accounting:

100

1.

Create Journal Line Description.

2.

Create Account Rule.

3.

Duplicate Journal Entry Rule Set.

4.

Duplicate Subledger Accounting Method.

5.

Create Invoice and Credit Memo.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Create Journal Line Description


-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_This section is to be performed by the instructor in preparation for this course.
Participants should not perform this section.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_Background
Use description rules to build the descriptions for subledger journal entry headers and
lines.
Activity Scope
Define a description rule for Oracle Fusion Payables invoices.
In this activity you will assign different description rules based on the invoice type:

If the Invoice Type = Standard, the journal line description will include
Supplier Name and Supplier Number.

If the Invoice Type is not equal to Standard (i.e. credit memos, debit
memos, adjustments), the journal line description will include Invoice Type
and Invoice Number.

Perform the following tasks:


1. Navigator > Setup and Maintenance.
2. Click the Manage Implementation Projects link.
3. Query your XXImplementation Project and click the link.
4. Expand Financials.
5. Expand Define Invoicing and Payments Configuration.
6. Expand Define Subledger Accounting for Invoicing and Payments.
7. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Rules.
8. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Methods task list.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

101

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


9. For Manage Description Rules, select Go to Task.
10. Select Create in the Search Results table.
11. Enter unique Name: XX Description.
12. Enter Short Name (all caps, no spaces): XXDESCRIPTION.
13. Enter Description: XX DESCRIPTION.
14. In the Rules region click Create.
15. In the Create Description Rule window, type the text: Supplier:

16. Click on the Source button.


17. In the Search dropdown, select: Name and enter Supplier Name. Click on the
arrow pointing right.
18. Select Supplier Name for the Payables Subledger. Click OK.

19. Type the text: , Supplier Number:

102

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

20. Click on the Source button.


21. In the Search dropdown, select: Name and enter: Invoice Supplier Number.
Click on the arrow pointing right.
22. Select Invoice Supplier Number for the Payables Subledger. Click OK.

23. Select Save and Close.


24. Create a condition for Rule 1. Place your cursor in the Rule 1: Conditions
region text box, and delete the existing text No conditions found.
25. Select Source.

26. In the Search dropdown, select: Name


27. In the Search field, enter: Invoice Type. Click on the arrow pointing right.
28. Select Payables: Invoice Type.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

103

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

29. Select OK. (Due to a bug in the environment, clicking OK does not close the
window, so click on the X at the top right corner to close the window after clicking
OK.)
30. Select Operator: Equal To (=).

31. Press Insert Value button


32. Select Standard. (There is a bug that causes the drop down to be blank, so
please type STANDARD.)

33. Select Validate.


34. An Information window appears: Validation is complete. Select OK.
35. In the Rules region click Create.
36. In the Create Description Rule window, type Invoice Type:
37. Click on the Source button.
38. In the Search dropdown, select: Name
39. In the Search field, enter: Invoice Type. Click on the arrow pointing right.
40. Select Invoice Type for the Payables Subledger. Click OK.
41. Type the text: , Invoice Number:

104

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


42. Click on the Source button.
43. In the Search dropdown, select: Name
44. In the Search field, enter: Invoice Number. Click on the arrow pointing right.
45. Select Invoice Number for the Payables Subledger. Click OK.
46. Click Save and Close
47. In the Rule 2: Conditions text box, delete the text No conditions found.
48. Click Validate. Click OK in the message Validation is complete.
49. Select Save and Close.
50. Select Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

105

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Create Account Rule


-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_This section is to be performed by the instructor in preparation for this course.
Participants should not perform this section.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_Background
Use account rules to determine the accounts for subledger journal entry lines.
Activity Scope
Define an account rule for the Oracle Fusion Payables subledger.
In this activity you will assign different account combination rules based on the invoice
type:
1.

If the Invoice Type = Standard, use Invoice Distribution Account, which is


the entered distribution in Manage Distributions
(101.10.15170.000.000.000).

2.

If the Invoice Type is not equal to Standard, use Default Distribution


Account, which is the entered distribution on the invoice line
(101.10.15160.000.000.000).

Log in as Your User to create an account rule.


Perform the following tasks:
1. Navigator > Setup and Maintenance.
2. Click the Manage Implementation Projects link.
3. Query your XXImplementation Project and click the link.
4. Expand Financials.
5. Expand Define Invoicing and Payments Configuration.
6. Expand Define Subledger Accounting for Invoicing and Payments.
7. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Rules.
8. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Methods.

106

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


9. Select Go to Task for Manage Account Rules.
10. Select Create.
11. Enter unique Name: XXAccount Rule.
12. Enter Short Name (all caps, no spaces): XXACCOUNT_RULE.
13. Enter Description: XXAccount Rule.
14. Chart of Accounts: Must be left blank in this example.
15. Rule Type: Account Combination.
16. Select Save
17. In the Rules region click Add Row.
18. Select Value Type: Source.
19. Select Value: Invoice Distribution Account for the Payables Subledger.
20. Create a condition for Rule 1. Place your cursor in the Rule 1: Conditions
region text box, and delete the existing text No conditions found.
21. Select Source.
22. Search Name: Invoice Type.
23. Click Search arrow.
24. Select Payables: Invoice Type.
25. Select OK. (Due to a bug in the environment, clicking OK does not close the
window, so click on the X at the top right corner to close the window after clicking
OK.)
26. Select Operator: Equal To (=).
27. Type STANDARD after the = sign.

28. Select Validate.


29. An Information window appears: Validation is complete. Select OK.
30. In the Rules region click Add Row.
31. Select Value Type: Source.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

107

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


32. Select Value: Default Distribution Account.
33. Create a condition for Rule 2. Place your cursor in the Rule 1: Conditions
region text box, and delete the existing text No conditions found.
34. Select Source.
35. Search Name: Invoice Type.
36. Click Search arrow.
37. Select Payables: Invoice Type.
38. Select OK. (Due to a bug in the environment, clicking OK does not close the
window, so click on the X at the top right corner to close the window after clicking
OK.)
39. Select Operator: Not Equal To (!=).
40. Type STANDARD after the operator.

41. Select Validate.


42. An Information window appears: Validation is complete. Select OK.
43. Select Save and Close.
44. Select Done.

108

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Duplicate Journal Entry Rule Set


-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_This section is to be performed by the instructor in preparation for this course.
Participants should not perform this section.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_Background
The journal entry rule set is a collection of rules. These rules are used to create
balanced journal entries for a given event type.
Activity Scope
Use an existing journal entry rule set to duplicate for use in the activities.
Log in as Your User to duplicate a journal entry rule set.
Perform the following tasks:
1. Navigator > Setup and Maintenance.
2. Click the Manage Implementation Projects link.
3. Query your XXImplementation Project and click the link.
4. Expand Financials.
5. Expand Define Invoicing and Payments Configuration.
6. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Rules.
7. Expand the Define Subledger Accounting Methods task list.
8. Select Go to Task for the Manage Subledger Journal Entry Rule Sets task.
9. Select the row header Name: Invoice Accrual Basis journal entry rule set.
10. Select Actions: Duplicate.
11. Enter Name: XXInvoice Accrual Basis.
12. Enter Short Name: XXINVOICE_ACCRUAL_BASIS,.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

109

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


13. Enter Description: XXInvoice Accrual Basis.
14. NOTE: You must leave the Chart of Accounts blank.
15. Click Save and Close twice.
16. Select the row header Name: Credit Memo Accrual Basis journal entry rule set.
17. Select Actions: Duplicate.
18. Enter Name: XXCredit Memo Accrual Basis.
19. Enter Short Name: XXCREDITMEMO_ACCRUAL_BASIS.
20. Enter Description: XXCredit Memo Accrual Basis.
21. NOTE: You must leave the Chart of Accounts blank.
22. Click Save and Close.
NOTE: Assign your new sub-component rules: account combination rule and
description rule at the line level. For both XXInvoice Accrual Basis and XXCredit
Memo Accrual Basis journal entry rule sets, perform the following:
23. In the Journal Lines region, Item Expense line, select Account Combination
Rule: XXAccount Rule. Also select XXDescription in the Line Description
column.

24. Select Save and Close.


25. In the Manage Subledger Journal Entry Rule Set window, select the row
header for the XXInvoice Accrual Basis or XXCredit Memo Accrual Basis.
26. Select Actions: Change Status to Activate.
27. Click Yes to answer the question: Warning: You have selected to change the
status value on this record. Do you want to continue?

110

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


28. Verify the Status of both journal rulesets is Active.
29. Select Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

111

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Duplicate Subledger Accounting Method


-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_This section is to be performed by the instructor in preparation for this course.
Participants should not perform this section.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_Background
The new journal line rules will be added to a duplicated Accounting Method.
Activity Scope
You will:
Duplicate and edit the accounting method for the Transaction System subledger.
Log in as Your User to edit the accounting method.
Perform the following tasks:
1. Navigator > Setup and Maintenance.
2. Click the Manage Implementation Projects link.
3. Query your XXImplementation Project and click the link.
4. Expand Financials.
5. Expand Define Invoicing and Payments Configuration.
6. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Rules.
7. Expand Define Subledger Accounting Methods task list.
8. Select Go to Task for the Manage Accounting Methods task.
9. Select the row header Name: US Standard Accrual accounting method.
10. Select Actions: Duplicate.
11. Enter Name: XX US Accrual Basis.
112

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


12. Enter Short Name: XX_US_ACCRUAL_BASIS.
13. Enter Description: XXUSAccrual Basis.
14. NOTE: The Chart of Accounts is already selected.
15. Click Save and Close.
16. End date the Invoices Event Class: Yesterday's date.
17. Select Add Row.
18. Select Event Class: Invoices.
19. Select Event Type: All.
20. Select Rule Set: XXInvoice Accrual Method.
21. Enter Start Date: Today's date.

22. End date the Credit Memo Event Class: Yesterday's date.
23. Select Add Row.
24. Select Event Class: Credit Memo.
25. Select Event Type: All.
26. Select Rule Set: XXCredit Memo Accrual Method.
27. Enter Start Date: Today's date.
28. Select Save and Close.
29. Select Done.

Change the subledger accounting method for US PL ledger:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

113

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


1. Navigator > Setup and Maintenance.
2. Click the Manage Implementation Projects link.
3. Query your XXImplementation Project and click the link.
4. Expand Financials.
5. Expand Define Common Applications Configurations for Financials
6. Expand Define Ledgers
7. Expand Define Accounting Configurations
8. Go to Specify Ledger Options task. Click on the link in the Selected Scope
column and select US Primary Ledger before clicking on the Go to Task icon
for the Specify Ledger Options task..
9. Change the subledger accounting method to XX US Accrual Basis.

10. Select Save and Close.


Ensure the current period is Open for both the primary ledger and secondary ledger:
1. Navigator>General Accounting > Period Close.
2. In the top left corner check that the Data Access Set is US Primary Ledger. If
that is not the value then click the Change button and select the appropriate
ledger value.
3. Check that the period status for General Ledger, Payables, Receivables and
Assets is Open for the current period. If the period status is Never Opened,
select the General Ledger icon on this page which will take you to the task Edit
Accounting Period Statuses. Select the current period record and click Open
Period. Repeat this action for the Payables, Receivables, etc. and open the
current period.
4. Select Done.

114

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


5. In the top left corner you now need to change to the secondary ledger so click
the Change button for the Data Access Set and set the value to US IFRS
Secondary Ledger. If not available, provide yourself access via the Data Access
Set Security from Lesson 2.
6. Check that the period status for General Ledger, Payables, Receivables and
Assets is Open for the current period. If the period status is Never Opened,
select the General Ledger icon on this page which will take you to the task Edit
Accounting Period Statuses. Select the current period record and click Open
Period. Select Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

115

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting

Create Invoice and Credit Memo, Create Accounting, Review


Subledger Journal Entries
-_-_-_-_-_- INSTRUCTOR NOTE -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_Creating the invoice and credit memo is to be performed by the instructor in
preparation for this course.
Participants should review the subledger accounting entries and general ledger
journals.
-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-

Background
Use an Oracle Fusion Payables invoice and credit memo to demonstrate the
application of accounting rules.

Instructor Activity Scope


Create an Oracle Fusion Payables invoice and credit memo.
3.

Log in as Your User to create Invoices.

4.

Navigate to the Invoices work area.

Perform the following tasks to create an invoice:


1. Navigate: Home > Navigator > Payables > Invoices.
2. Select Create Invoice from the Invoices task list.
3. Select Business Unit: US1 Business Unit.
4. Search Supplier: Advanced Corp.
5. Enter Number: XX_STDINV_001.
6. Enter Amount: 54.75.
7. Enter Description: Invoice for subledger accounting activities.

116

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


8. Enter Date: Todays date
9. Accept all other defaults at the header level.
10. In the Lines region, Click Add Row.
11. Enter Amount: 50.
12. Click the Distribution link.
13. Click the Distribution Combination: Account Selector.
14. Complete the Distribution Combination: 101.10.15160.000.000.000.
15. Select Actions: Manage Distributions.
16. Update Item line: Account: 15170.
17. Click Save and Close.
18. Select Invoice Actions: Validate.
19. Note: Invoice Status Summary: Validation: Validated.
20. In the Invoice Actions menu, select Account in Draft.
21. Select Save
22. Go back to the Invoice Actions menu and select View Accounting and review
the accounting lines that are created in Draft mode.
23. Note that per account rule, the Invoice: XX_STDINV_001: Invoice Item expense
Account (101.10.15170.000.000.000) is the Invoice Distribution Account,
which is the entered distribution in the invoice Manage Distributions region.
Also note the journal line description for the Expense journal line.
24. Go back to the Actions menu and select Account and Post to Ledger. This
creates accounting in Final mode and transfers it to General Ledger.
25. Click Done
26. Go back to the Invoice Actions menu and select View Accounting. If the
Accounting Status shows Draft it means the accounting in final mode has not
completed, so you have to re-query the invoice to get the latest status. Once the
create accounting process has completed the Accounting Status should show
Final in the View Accounting window. Expand any of the accounting lines and
note the Journal Batch name. You will need this later to query to Journal Batch
in General Ledger.
27. Click Save and Close on the invoice.

Perform the following tasks to create a Credit Memo:


1. Navigate: Home > Navigator > Payables > Invoices.
2. Select Create Invoice from the Invoices task list.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

117

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


3. Select Business Unit: Vision US1 Business Unit.
4. Search Supplier: Advanced Corp.
5. Enter Number: XX_CreditMemo_001.
6. Enter Amount: -54.75.
7. Select Type: Credit Memo.
8. Enter Description: Credit memo for subledger accounting activities.
9. Enter Date: Todays date.
10. Accept all other defaults at the header level.
11. In the Lines region, Click Add Row.
12. Enter Amount: -50.
13. Click the Distribution link.
14. Click the Distribution Combination: Account Selector.
15. Complete the Distribution Combination: 101.10.15160.000.000.000.
16. Click Save.
17. Select Actions: Manage Distributions.
18. Update Item line Account to 15170.
19. Save and Close
20. Click Invoice Actions: Validate.
21. Note: Invoice Status Summary: Validation: Validated.
22. In the Invoice Actions menu, select Account in Draft.
23. Select Save
24. Go back to the Invoice Actions menu and select View Accounting and review
the accounting lines that are created in Draft mode.
25. Note that per the account rule, the Credit Memo: XX-CreditMemo_001: Invoice
Item expense Account (101.10.15160.000.000.000) is the Default Distribution
Account, which is the entered distribution on the invoice line. Also note the
journal line description for the Expense journal line.
26. Go back to the Invoice Actions menu and select Account and Post to Ledger.
27. Go back to the Invoice Actions menu and select View Accounting. If the
Accounting Status shows Draft it means the accounting in final mode has not
completed, so you have to re-query the invoice to get the latest status. Once the
Create Accounting process has completed the Accounting Status should show
Final in the View Accounting window. Expand any of the accounting lines and
note the Journal Batch name. You will need this later to query to Journal Batch
in General Ledger.

118

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


28. Click Save and Close on the invoice.
Review Subledger Journal Entry:
1. Navigator > Payables > Invoices, or Navigator > General Accounting >
Journals.
2. Select (Subledger) Accounting task list > Review Journal Entries task.
3. Enter Ledger: US Primary Ledger
4. Enter Journal Source: Payables.
5. Enter Date: Between: Yesterday and todays date.
6. Enter Transactions Number: Starts with: XX
7. Click Search.
8. Select the row header for XX_STDINV_001.
9. Expand the Journal Entry Details region.
10. Click View Journal Entry.
11. Select the Journal Summary tab: View Journal Entry.
12. From the Journal Entry page, you can view additional journal header and line
details.
13. Click Actions: View T-Accounts. Note that you can select Balance Option to
alter the view.
14. Click Done.
15. Click View Transaction.
16. Click Done.
17. Click Done.
Review GL journal entry:
1. Navigator > General Accounting > Journals.
2. Select Manage Journals task.
3. Enter Journal Batch name you noted down earlier.
4. Click Search.
5. Click on the journal batch.
6. Note: Batch Status: Posted, and Completion Status: Complete.
7. You can drill from any of the journal lines back to Subledger Accounting and back
to AP transaction.
Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

119

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


8. Click Cancel.
The Create Accounting process can also be run in batch mode. We will not perform
this step in our class because it will interfere with the hands-on experience of your
peers. But instructions are included here for your information.
Submit the Create Accounting process:
1. Navigator > Payables > Invoices.
2. Select Accounting task list > Create Accounting task.
3. Select Subledger Application: Payables.
4. Select Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
5. Select Process Category: Invoices.
6. Select End Date: Last day of month.
7. Select Accounting Mode: Draft or Final
8. Select Report Style: Detail.
9. Select Transfer to General Ledger: No if Draft mode; Yes if Final mode.
10. Select Post in General Ledger: No if Draft mode; Yes if Final mode and you
want journals posted automatically.
11. Enter Journal Batch: XXCreate Accounting. (Only used if Accounting Mode =
Final.)
12. Select Submit.
13. Make a note of the Request ID number in the Information window.
14. Select OK.
View the results:
1. Navigator > Tools > Submit and Monitor Processes or Navigator > Tools >
Scheduled Processes.
2. If you get a Warning: . . . Do you want to continue?, select Yes.
3. Click Search.
4. NOTE: You will see your Process ID xxxxx: Display Name: Create
Accounting. There will be two additional processes with Display Name: Create
Accounting: Worker and Create Accounting Execution Report.
5. Click Refresh until the Create Accounting Execution Report, Status:
Succeeded.

120

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Oracle Fusion Subledger Accounting


6. Select the row header for Search Results: Display Name: Create Accounting
Execution Report: Status row.
7. Select OK on the Information window.
8. Create Accounting Execution Report, #####: Details region will appear.
9. Scroll to the bottom and select Output Name: Default Document link.
10. A PDF report display appears. Hover to display the PDF tool bar. Save to
desktop. File name is outputDocument.pdf.
11. Open the file from the desktop to view the report results.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

121

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing

Lesson 7:

Intercompany Balancing

Intercompany Activities

The following are activities for Oracle Fusion Financials Common Module,
Intercompany.

1.

Review Intercompany Balancing Rules and Ledger Balancing Options

2.

Review journals balanced with different intercompany balancing rules


and ledger balancing options

3.

Submit and review reconciliation reports

-_-_-_-_-_- Preliminary Setup -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_In preparation for this course, one student per environment will be asked to
verify/set up the following:
1. Navigate: Home page > Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance >
Manage Implementation Projects
2. Select your implementation project.
3. Expand Financials.
4. Expand Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules.
5. Select Go to Task for Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules.
6. Select From Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
7. Click Search.
8. In the Search Results region, select the Primary Segment Rules tab.
9. Click the Create icon to create a new rule with the following details:
a. Primary Segment Rule
Source Other
Category Other
Transaction Type None
From Ledger US Primary Ledger
To Ledger US Primary Ledger
122

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing


From Legal Entity US1 Legal Entity
To Legal Entity leave blank (All Other will default later)
From Primary Segment Value 101
To Primary Segment Value All Other
Receivables Account 101.10.12300.000.000.000
Payables Account 101.10.22270.000.000.000
Start Date Date prior to todays date e.g. 1/1/2009
End Date Null
10. Click Save and Close
11. Click the Chart of Accounts Rules tab and verify the following rule exists.
a. Chart of Accounts Rule
Chart of Accounts US Chart of Accounts
Receivables Account 101.10.18100.000.000.000
Payables Account 101.10.29100.000.000.000
Start Date Date prior to todays date e.g. 1/1/2009
End Date Null
Source Other
Category Other
Transaction Type None
12. Click Save and Close
13. Go to Setup and Maintenance > Manage Journal Sources and uncheck
Journal Approval. In Search Tasks, enter Manage Journal Sources. Click Go
To Task for Manage Journal Sources. Set Require Journal Approval to
unchecked for the journal source Other.

-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ -_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

123

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing

View Intercompany Balancing Rules and Ledger Balancing Options


Background
View Intercompany Balancing Rules and Intercompany Ledger Balancing Options.
View Intercompany Balancing Rules applied to journals.
Perform the following tasks to view Intercompany Balancing Rules:
1. Navigate: Home page > Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance >
Manage Implementation Projects
2. Select your implementation project.
3. Expand Financials.
4. Expand Define and Maintain Intercompany Processing Rules.
5. Select Go to Task for Manage Intercompany Balancing Rules.
6. Select From Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
7. Click Search.
8. In the Search Results region, select the Primary Segment Rules tab.
9. View the existing balancing rules and ensure there is a rule between 101 and All
Other.
10. Click the View icon in the Receivables Account column and the Payables
Account column to view the description of the segment values.
11. Select the Chart of Accounts Rules tab.
12. View the existing balancing rules.
13. Click Cancel.
14. Select Go to Task for Manage Ledger Balancing Options.
15. View Search Results region. Review the rules.
16. Click Cancel.
Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal with mixed balancing
segment value assignments (legal entity and ledger):
1. Navigate: Home page > Navigator > General Accounting > Journals

124

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing


2. Select Create Journals task.
3. Create Journal Name XX1 Intercompany with Category Adjustment. Use your
initials for XX.
4. Select accounting period 03-14.
5. Enter the following journal lines. 101 is assigned to a legal entity and 203 is
assigned to the ledger.
203.10.59110.000.000.000

1,000.00

101.10.42000.000.000.000

1,000.00

6. Click Post and note down request ID.


7. Click Cancel to get back to the Manage Journals screen. Search for your
journal using your initials.
8. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
9. View journal lines.
Note that intercompany balancing lines are generated to balance the journal
between primary balancing segment values 101 and 203 and the appropriate
trading partner value is populated into the intercompany segment of the
balancing lines.
Note that when balancing from 101 to 203 the Primary Segment Rule is used to
build the intercompany receivable account and when balancing between 203 and
101 the Chart of Accounts Rule is used to build the intercompany payables
account.
10. Click Cancel.
Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal with balancing
segment values assigned directly to a ledger:
1. Navigate: Home page > Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Select Create Journals task.
3. Create Journal Name XX2 Intercompany with Category Adjustment.
4. Select accounting period 03-14.
5. Enter the following journal lines. 204 and 251 are assigned to the ledger but not
to any legal entities.
204.10.59210.000.000.000

1,000.00

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

125

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing


251.90.42000.000.000.000

1,000.00

6. Click Post and note down request ID.


7. Click Cancel to get back to the Manage Journals screen. Search for your
journal using your initials.
8. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
9. View journal lines.
Note that ledger balancing lines are generated using the chart of accounts rule to
balance the journal between primary balancing segment values 204 and 251.
Note that while balancing the primary balancing segment values, balancing
segment 2 was also balanced between 10 and 90.
10. Click Cancel.

Perform the following tasks to enter and post a GL journal that balances by
primary balancing segment but not by balancing segment 2:
1. Navigate: Home page > Navigator > General Accounting > Journals
2. Select Create Journals task.
3. Create Journal Name XX3 Intercompany with Category Adjustment.
4. Select accounting period 03-14.
5. Enter the following journal lines.
101.30.59110.000.000.000
101.10.42000.000.000.000

1,000.00
1,000.00

6. Click Post and note down request ID.


7. Click Cancel to get back to the Manage Journals screen. Search for your
journal using your initials.
8. Click the Journal Name to drill down to view your posted journal.
9. View journal lines.
Note that since the journal balances by primary balancing segment balancing
lines are generated to balance the journal between balancing segment 2 values
30 and 10. Ledger Balancing Options for US Primary Ledger are used to build
the accounts.

126

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing


Note that the intercompany segment for the balancing lines is not populated with
the trading partner for balancing segment 2.
10. Click Cancel.

Submit and Review Reconciliation Reports


Background
The Intercompany Accountant reconciles intercompany account balances at the end
of an accounting period utilizing the Intercompany Reconciliation Report.
Activity Scope
1.

Submit the Extract Intercompany Reconciliation Data process.

2.

Review the Intercompany reconciliation report.

Submit the Extract Intercompany Reconciliation Data Process


1. Log in as Your User.
2. Navigator > Intercompany Accounting > Reconciliation.
3. Select Tasks > Intercompany Reconciliation.
4. Select Submit button at the top right corner of the page. This takes you directly
to the submission window for the Extract Intercompany Reconciliation Data
process.
5. Enter Provider Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
6. Enter Provider Accounting Period: 03-14. Leave all other fields blank.
7. Click Submit.
8. Note the Process ID in the Information window.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Back
11. In the Manage Scheduled Processes window, select Refresh.
Review the Intercompany Reconciliation Reports
1. For the line with your Process ID, click the refresh icon until the status displays
Succeeded.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

127

Lesson 7: Intercompany Balancing


2. In the BI Publishing Options region (top of the screen), select the refresh icon,
and then select your Request ID from the drop down.
3. Click View Report. This will take you to the Intercompany Reconciliation
Period Summary report.
4. The Period Summary Report displays several rows. Note that where the
Provider LE or Receiver LE is displayed as UNASSIGNED, this means the
primary balancing segment value on the balancing line is not assigned to a legal
entity.
5. Review the intercompany receivable balance that US1 Legal Entity has against
US2 Legal Entity, and the intercompany payable balance that US2 Legal Entity
has against US1 Legal Entity. Note there is a difference in the right-most
column. The hyperlinks on the amount fields provide drill down capability. Click
on the difference amount.
6. Review the Summary by Source page. Notice the balance for intercompany
receivables is higher than the balance for intercompany payables. Drill down on
the difference amount down to the journal. The difference is due to the
intercompany payables balance of Intercompany Batch 2020 not having been
transferred and posted to General Ledger, whereas the intercompany
receivables balance has been transferred and posted.
7. Click Cancel to return to the journal lines page. Click Back to Source
Summary Report button. Click Back to Period Summary Report button.
8. You can click on any amount with a hyperlink on any page to view the details
behind the balance. Review the remaining rows on the report and drill down to
see the details of the journals you posted. Note that your journal XX3
Intercompany is not reflected on the report because it was only balanced for
balancing segment 2. The report only includes balancing lines for the primary
balancing segment.
9. You can also choose different output formats in which to review the data.
10. Click Done.

128

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax

Lesson 8:

Oracle Fusion Tax

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax Activities


The following are activities for Oracle Fusion Tax:

Viewing Calculated Tax on a Receivables Transaction

Creating a Minimum Tax Configuration

Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Receivables Transaction

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

129

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax

Viewing Calculated Tax on a Receivables Transaction

Background
After setting up your tax configuration and verifying the transaction results through
testing, you can enable the applicable tax or taxes for transactions. The tax
determination process uses your tax configuration and the details on the transaction to
determine which taxes apply to the transaction and how to calculate the tax amount for
each tax that applies to the transaction.
You completed your set up and testing of your US sales tax configuration and are now
ready to apply it to a Receivables transaction.
Activity Scope
In this demonstration you will view the calculated US sales tax on a Receivables sales
invoice.
Sign in using your user.
Viewing calculated taxes on a Receivables transaction:
Begin by navigating to the Billing work area.
1. Navigator > Receivables > Billing.
2. Click the Manage Transactions link.
Use the Manage Transactions page to review, create, and edit open debits and
credits.
3. Enter 1001751 in the Transaction Number field and click the Search button.
4. Click the 1001751 link in the Transaction Number column.
5. Review the transaction details.
6. In the Tax field, click the Tax amount to view the tax calculated on the invoice
lines.
130

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax


Note: You can also click the Edit icon next to the Tax field amount to edit tax
lines depending on your security settings and options specified during tax setup.
Note: The Edit icon only appears if the option Allow override of calculated
tax lines is enabled:

Note: You could also click the Edit icon next to the Tax field amount to edit tax
lines, if the option Allow override of calculated tax lines were enabled for
Receivables invoices created for this Business Unit, as it will be defined in the
next activity (Creating a Minimum Tax Configuration).
7. Use the Detail Tax Lines window to manage tax information for an invoice. Tax
was calculated on the transaction line based on the tax setup.
8. Click the horizontal scrollbar to view the tax rates and tax amounts.
9. Click the Save and Close button.
10. Click the Save and Close list item. Once you save your transaction, a message
appears indicating that it was saved.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

131

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax

11. Click the OK button to the Information message.


12. Click Done.

132

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax

Creating a Minimum Tax Configuration


Background
You are setting up your transaction tax configuration for your US based organization.
Activity Scope
In this example, you will learn how to create a new minimum tax configuration for US
Sales and Use tax.
Sign in using your user.
Note: This practice is for illustrative purposes and may not represent your true tax
model. For example:

The recommended setup for US sales tax is to create three different taxes
within the one tax regime to define state, county, and city taxes. You would
create multiple tax jurisdictions for each tax to cover the states, counties, and
cities that you need.

The tax rates may not represent actual tax rates.

You can use third party content for the creation of all detailed US tax
jurisdictions and tax rates, as well as the creation of all required geography
information such as states, counties, cities, and postal codes.

Defining a Tax Regime:


From within the Define Tax Configuration task list, create a tax regime using the
following steps.
Note: When implementing transaction tax, the Manage Tax Regimes task prompts you
to Select and Add or Create New the scope value for the implementation project. You
can select an existing tax regime value or define a new tax regime value to set the
scope.
The tax regime scope value filters existing taxes and assigns the tax regime value to
any newly defined taxes. The same logic applies to the next step in the foundation
setup. Tax regime, tax, tax status, and tax rate are all scope values defined within the
implementation project.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

133

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax

Defining scope values is optional and for the purposes of this demonstration, we
are not identifying any scope values. All features are selected by default.
Begin by navigating to the Setup and Maintenance work area.
1. Go to Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance >Manage Implementation
Projects > XX Implementation Project > Financials > Define Common
Financials Configuration > Define Tax Configuration > Manage Tax
Regimes
2. Click the Go to Task icon for the Manage Tax Regimes task.
3. On the Manage Tax Regimes page click the Create icon.
4. Enter XX US SUT in the Tax Regime Code field.
5. Enter US Sales and Use Tax in the Tax Regime Name field.
6. Leave the default value Country in the Regime Level field.
7. Enter United States in the Country field.
8. Enter 1/1/2001 in the Start Date field.
9. Select USD - US Dollar in the Tax Currency field.
10. Enter 0.01 in the Minimum Accountable Unit field.
The value of 2 will automatically appear as a default in the Tax Precision field.
11. Select the Allow tax rounding override option.
12. In the Configuration Options tab, select US1 Business Unit in the Party Name
field.
13. In the Configuration for Taxes and Rules field, select Common configuration
with party overrides.
Common configuration appears as a default in the Configuration for Product
Exceptions field.
14. Enter 1/1/2001 in the Effective Start Date field.
15. Click the Save and Close button.
16. Click the Done button.
Defining a Tax:
You will be taken back to the Define Tax Configuration task list in the Setup and
Maintenance work area.

134

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax


17. Expand the Define Tax Configuration task list.
18. Click the Selected Scope Value link on Manage Taxes task.
19. In the Tax Regime field, select Select and Add then Apply and Go to Task
button. Select the same regime you created in the previous step, XX US SUT
and click the bottom right Save and Close button.
20. On the Manage Taxes page click the Create icon.
21. Accept the XX US SUT in the Tax Regime Code field.
22. In the Configuration Owner field, select Global configuration owner.
23. In the Tax field, enter XX US STATE SALES.
24. In the Tax Name field, enter US State Sales.
25. In the Tax Type field, select Sales tax.
26. In the Geography Type field, select STATE.
27. In the Parent Geography Type field, select COUNTRY.
28. In the Parent Geography Name field, enter United States.
Note. The Allow tax rounding override option is automatically selected
because you selected this option at the tax regime level.
29. Select the Allow override of calculated tax lines option.
30. Select the Allow entry of manual tax lines option.
31. Select the Allow duplicate registration numbers option.
32. Select the Allow creation of multiple jurisdictions option. The Allow creation
of multiple jurisdictions option is available because it was a feature selected by
default for the tax regime.
Note: The Allow tax exceptions option is automatically selected because it was
a feature selected by default for the tax regime.
Note: The Allow tax exemptions option is automatically selected because it
was a feature selected by default for the tax regime.
33. Click the Save button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

135

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax


34. Click the Tax Rule Defaults tab.
35. In the Place of Supply field, select Ship-to, use Bill-to if Ship-to is not found.
36. In the Tax Applicability field, select Applicable.
37. In the Tax Registration field, select Ship-from party.
STANDARD_TC appears as a default in the Tax Calculation Formula field.
STANDARD_TB appears as a default in the Taxable Basis Formula field.
38. Click the Save button.

Defining a default Tax Jurisdiction:


1. From the Tax Rule Defaults tab, select the Tax Jurisdiction row
Note: If you lose your place, Define Tax Configuration > Manage Taxes. Then
query your initials in the Tax field.
2. Click the Create Default button.
3. In the Tax Jurisdiction Code field, enter XX US TX STATE SALES.
4. In the Tax Jurisdiction Name field, enter US TX State Sales.
5. In the Geography Type field, select STATE.
6. In the Geography Name field, enter TX.
7. The values of COUNTRY and United States appear in the Parent Geography
Type and Parent Geography Name fields, respectively.
8. In the Default Start Date field, enter 01/01/2001.
9. Click the Save and Close button.
You will be directed back to the Edit Tax page.
Defining a default Tax Status:
1. On the Edit Tax page, Tax Rule Defaults tab, select the Tax Status row.
2. Click the Create Default button.
3. In the Tax Status Code field, enter XX US STATE SALES STANDARD.
4. In the Tax Status Name field, enter US State Sales Standard.
5. In the Default Start Date field, enter 01/01/2001.
6. Click the Save and Close button.

136

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax


You will be directed back to the Edit Tax page.
Defining a default Tax Rate:
1. On the Edit Tax page, Tax Rule Defaults tab, select the Tax Rate row.
2. Click the Create Default button.
3. In the Tax Status Code field, select XX US STATE SALES STANDARD from
the list of values.
4. In the Tax Rate Code field, enter XX US STATE SALES STANDARD.
5. In the Rate Periods table, e7.25nter 7.25 in the Rate Percentage field.
6. In the Effective Start Date field, enter 01/01/2001.
7. In the Default Start Date field, enter 01/01/2001.
8. Click the Save and Close button.
You will be directed back to the Edit Tax page.
Enabling a Tax for Simulation:
1. On the Edit Tax page select the Enable tax for simulation option.

Note: At this time, do not select to enable the tax for transactions until we test
the configuration using the Tax Simulator.
2. Click the Save and Close button.
3. Click Done.
For further information on setting up your minimum tax configuration, refer to Online
Help to view the demonstrations on:
4. Configuring Taxes for Transactions Part 1: Setting Up Tax Regimes.
5. Configuring Taxes for Transactions Part 2: Setting Up Defaults for Taxes.
6. Configuring Taxes for Transactions Part 3: Setting Up Tax Jurisdictions,
Tax Statuses, Tax Recovery Rates, and Tax Rates.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

137

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax

Using the Tax Simulator to Test a Receivables Transaction


Background
After setting up your tax configuration and verifying the transaction results through
testing, you can enable the applicable tax or taxes for transactions. The tax
determination process uses your tax configuration and the details on the transaction to
determine which taxes apply to the transaction and how to calculate the tax amount for
each tax that applies to the transaction.
You completed your set up and are now ready to test your US sales tax configuration on
a Receivables transaction.
Activity Scope
In this demonstration, you will use the Tax Simulator to test a Receivables transaction.
Sign in using your user.
Navigating to the Tax Simulator:
1. Click Navigator > Setup and Maintenance > Manage Implementation
Projects link.
2. In the Search Results table, click the XX Implementation Project link.
3. Expand Financials > Define Common Financials Configuration> Define Tax
Configuration
4. For the Manage Simulator Transactions task, click the Go to Task icon.
Use the Manage Simulator Transactions page to test your tax configuration
with existing transactions, as well as newly created transactions, without
impacting active data.
5. In the Tax Regime field, select Select and Add then Apply and Go to Task
button. Select the same regime you previously created, XX US SUT and click the
bottom right Save and Close button.

138

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax


Entering a Receivables transaction to test your tax setup:
1. Click the Create button.
2. In the Document Event Class field, select Sales invoice.
3. In the Legal Entity field, select US1 Legal Entity.
4. In the Business Unit field, select US1 Business Unit.
5. In the Document Number field, enter XX_SIMAR
6. In the Evaluate Taxes field, select Enabled for transactions and simulation.
The application processes all taxes enabled for transactions, simulation, or both.
7. Click the Name search icon to enter a Bill-To customer.
8. In the Name field, enter Dixon and click the Search button. Click the 59300 row
header and click OK.
9. Select Site: Dallas.
Enter line information for line number 1.
10. In the Line Description field, enter Hardware.
11. In the Amount field (scroll right), enter 3000.00.
12. Click the Save button.
Viewing tax lines:
13. Click the View Tax Lines button.
Use the Tax Line Details page to view additional details about the tax
calculation that applies to a specific detail tax line.
14. Use the header region to view attributes that drive tax determination or tax
calculation.
15. Use the tax line details table to view the calculated tax lines with the
corresponding tax configuration details for each transaction line.
16. Use the Rule Results region to view the processing and evaluation of the
rules associated with a rule type. For each tax rule listed in the tax rules
process results table, you can drill down to the associated rule conditions to
view the condition details. For this tax line no rules were evaluated. The default
values for the rule types were used in tax determination, so no rule conditions are
displayed.
17. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

139

Lesson 8: Oracle Fusion Tax


18. Click the Save and Close button > Done.
For further information on verifying your tax configuration, refer to Online Helpl to view
the demonstrations on:

140

Configuring Taxes for Transactions Part 4: Verifying Tax Configuration.

Configuring Tax Rules Part 2: Verifying Tax Applicability Rules.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units

Lesson 9:

Viewing Business Units

View the Business Unit that was system generated for you using the rapid
implementation spreadsheet.
NOTE: This activity is a prerequisite for Configuring Fusion Payables.
Viewing a Business Unit

1. Navigate: Navigator> Setup and Maintenance (Tools) > From the


Implementation Projects tab, select your Implementation Project >
Financials > Define Common Application Configuration for Financials >
Define Business Units.
2. Select Go to Task for Manage Business Units.
3. View your two business units: XX Canada Business Unit and XX US Business
Unit.
Note: Do NOT use periods, dashes, commas or special characters in your
Business Unit Name, such as ABC Co., Inc. This has caused issues generating
data roles. The UI does not currently validate this.
4. Leave the Default Set: COMMON and specify Location: Redwood City.
5. Click Save and Close.
6. From the Manage Business Units page, select XX Canada Business Unit and
select Actions > Assign Business Functions.
7. View the Business Unit Functions. All will be selected by default, you can clear
check boxes for those functions you do not want this BU to perform.
8. View the Primary Ledger and Default Legal Entity.
Note: The Below Legal Entity check box is a new feature in R9 to indicate that a
profit center business unit is below the legal entity. This is used in Inventory
Management to enable intercompany supply chain flows using Supply Chain
Financial Orchestration.
9. Select Save and Go to Task > Manage Business Unit Set Assignment.
10. In the Select Scope popup, select your XX Canada Business Unit by choosing
Select and Add > Apply and Go to Task.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

141

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units


11. View the Reference Data Sets assigned to the different sharable setup objects.
Leave the default as COMMON.
Note: This step is required even if you do not change anything. You must save
this record. If this business unit should not share certain setup objects with other
business units, then you would change the assigned Reference Data Sets.
12. Select Save and Go to Task > Manage Service Provider Relationships.
You should see your BU assigned at all three levels.

13. Click Save and Go to Task > View Service Clients.


14. View the data and then click Done.
15. You must now ADD the task, Configure Requisitioning Business Function.
Note: You need to manually add this task because we did not choose the
Procurement offering, but this task is required for Financials. In a future release,
we will add this task to the Financials offering.
16. On the Task Lists and Tasks tool bar, click + icon or Select and Add under
Actions drop down menu.
17. In the Search, select Tasks .
18. Search Name: Configure Requisitioning Business Function. Click it and click
Done.
19. Select Go to Task for Verify Data Role Generation for Business Unit.
20. Click Search Role Templates link.

142

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units

21. Search Display Name: Financials Common Module Template for Business
Unit Security
22. Click Open
23. Click Generate Roles button and click OK when the operation is complete.
24. Close the Entitlements Server window.
25. Select Go to Task for Provision Roles to Implementation Users for Business
Unit.
26. Click Administration link at the top right.
27. Click Advanced Search Users
28. Search for your user, select it, and click Open.
Note: Make sure your user is the User Type Employee. You need to be an
employee because we will make you a Buyer.
29. Click Roles tab
30. Click Assign
31. Search by Name:
FUN_FINANCIAL_APPLICATION_ADMINISTRATOR_JOB_XX Canada
Business Unit
32. Select the role, and then click Add.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

143

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units


33. Close OIM window.
34. Select Go to Task for Verify Data Role Generation for Business Unit
Business Function. (This is required for Payables.)
35. Click Search Role Templates link.
36. Search by Display Name: Payables Template for Business Function
Payables Invoicing. Select the record, and click Open.
37. Click Generate Roles button, then click OK.
38. Click Summary tab
39. Expand Valid Roles
40. Scroll down to view the new roles

AP_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_SPECIALIST_JOB_XXBusiness Unit

AP_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_SUPERVISOR_JOB_XXBusiness Unit

AP_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_MANAGER_JOB_XXBusiness Unit

41. Close OIM.


42. Select Go to Task for Provision Roles to Implementation Users for Business
Unit.
43. Click Administration link.
44. Search your user and then open the record.
45. Click Roles tab
46. Click Assign
47. Enter Name field: AP%XX%
48. Click Search
49. Assign the following AP data roles. Hint: You should use the Name field to
search for these data roles. You can use wildcards %. You can multi-select by
using the Ctrl key.

AP_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_SPECIALIST_JOB_XX Canada Business


Unit

AP_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_SUPERVISOR_JOB_XX Canada Business


Unit

AP_ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE_MANAGER_JOB_XX Canada Business Unit

50. Click Add


51. Close OIM.
52. Expand Define Facilities for Financials task list

144

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units


53. Select Go to Task for the Manage Inventory Organizations task.
Note: At the client site, you must define the prerequisites to creating an inventory org:

Manage Facility Shifts


Manage Facility Workday Patterns
Manage Facility Schedules

For this class, you can skip the above steps.

54. Click Create icon


55. Enter the following:

Name: XXInventory Org.

Organization: XXINVORG (All CAPS and No spaces allowed)

Management Business Unit: XX Canada Business Unit

Legal Entity: XX Canada Legal Entity

Location Address Name: Redwood City

56. Click Next.


57. Enter the following:
General

Schedule: Salaried 8 Hour Schedule

Item Master Organization: XX Inventory Org

Starting Revision: 1

Lot, Serial Number, and Packing Unit

Uniqueness: No uniqueness control

Starting Serial Number: 1

58. Leave the defaults for the rest of the fields, then click Save and Close.
59. Click Done
You need to add a task called Configure Procurement Business Function
because we did not select the Procurement offering when we created our
Implementation Project. Note: In a future release, you will not have to do this.
60. Select the + sign to open the Select and Add: Task Lists and Tasks window.
61. Search Tasks and Name Configure Procurement Business Function. Select it
and click Done button at the bottom of the window.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

145

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units


62. Select Go to Task for Configure Procurement Business Function.
63. Select Procurement BU: XX Canada Business Unit and OK. (You may need to
wait a few seconds, even minutes.)
64. Enter the following:

Payment Terms: Immediate

Inventory Organization: XXINVORG

Currency: USD

Maximum Lines in PDF: 50

65. Click Save and Close


You will now add the Manage Procurement Agents task.
66. Click + icon or Select and Add under Actions drop down menu.
67. Select Search: Tasks
68. Search Name: Manage Procurement Agents, select it, and click Done.
69. Select Go to Task for Manage Procurement Agents. Choose the Procurement
BU: XX Canada Business Unit and click OK.
70. Select the Create icon and enter the following:

Procurement BU: XX Canada Business Unit.

Agent: Your User. (Last name, First Name)

Default Requisitioning BU: XX Canada Business Unit.

NOTE: This would give your user access to this Procurement BU.
71. Click Save and Close.
72. Click Done.
73. Select Go to Task for the Configure Requisitioning Business Function task.
(This task may be at the very bottom of the task list.)
74. Select your BU for the Requisitioning BU: XX Canada Business Unit, and click
OK.
75. Select Default Deliver-to Organization: XX Inventory Org.
76. Select One-Time Location: Headquarters
77. Click Save and Close.

146

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 9: Viewing Business Units

Review a Supplier
Activity Scope

1. Navigator> Procurement > Suppliers.


2. Click the Manage Suppliers link in the Tasks pane to open the Manage
Suppliers page.
3. Search by Supplier Adv.
4. Click the Supplier Advanced Corp link in the Search Results region to open the
Edit Supplier: Advanced Corp tab.
5. Click the Sites tab.
6. Click the Create icon to add a Site. Enter the following:

Address Name: AC Progresss US

7. Leave the rest of the defaults. Click Save and Close.


8. Click the Site link to edit it.
9. Click the Site Assignments tab.
10. Click the green + and enter the following:

Client BU: XX Canada Business Unit

Bill-to BU: XX Canada Business Unit

Liability Distribution: 4888-000-21010-4888

11. Click Save and Close.


12. Click Cancel.
Note: To create a supplier, the Supplier Administrator role must be assigned
to your user. (This is the seeded role that can create suppliers.) Also, the
worker associated with your login must be defined as a Procurement Agent in
the Business Unit where you are trying to add the site and site assignment.
Also the agent needs to have the Manage Supplier Task Access granted.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

147

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables


Lesson 10: Payables Activities

The following are Activities for Payables:

148

Create a Payment Term

Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement

Manage Invoice Options

Manage Payment Options

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables

Create a Payment Term


Background
In this activity, you will create a new payment term and assign the Common Set to the
term.
Activity Scope
Prerequisite activities
This activity assumes that the following prerequisite activities have been performed.

Create an Implementation Project

Defining Business Units

Provision a Data Role

Activity Steps
The installments and discounts for the payment term are as follows:

First installment: 40 percent due in 10 days with a discount of 5 percent if paid


in 7 days.

Second installment: 35 percent due in 20 days with a discount of 3 percent if


paid in 15 days.

Third installment: 25 percent due in 30 days with a discount of 2 percent if


paid in 25 days.

1. Sign in with your user name.


2. From your Implementation Project, expand Financials> Define Invoicing and
Payments Configuration > Define Payables > Define Common Options for
Payables and Procurement.
3. Click the Go to Task icon on the Manage Payment Terms task.
4. In the Scope Selection, Select and Add Business Unit.
5. Select your XX Canada Business Unit.
6. Click Create.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

149

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables


7. In the Name field, enter the payment term name XX Payment Terms, where XX
is the number assigned to you by the instructor or your initials.
8. In the Description field, enter Multiple installments with discounts.
9. Click Add Row in the Installments region.
10. Using the information in the table, enter installment line 1 in the Installments and
Discount regions.

11. Click Add Row in the Installments region.


12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for installment lines 2 and 3.
13. Click Add Row in the Set Assignments region.
14. Click the Set Codes list and select COMMON.
Note: You may need to save the record first.
15. Click Save and Close.
16. Click Done.

150

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables

Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement

Background
Complete the Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement task for
your business unit.
Activity Steps
1. Sign in with your user name.
2. Click the Navigator link.
3. From you Implementation Project, expand Financials > Define Invoicing and
Payments Configuration > Define Payables >
4. Select Go to Task for Manage Common Options for Payables and
Procurement.
The business unit name should display below the page title. If you get a
permissions error, check in Oracle Identity Manager that the data role for your
business unit is assigned to your user. See the Provision a Data Role activity
for the steps.
5. Enter the distribution information from the table below.
Field

Value

Liability

4888-000-21010-4888

Prepayment

4888-000-15015-4888

Conversion Rate Variance Gain

4888-222-60044-4888

Conversion Rate Variance Loss

4888-222-60044-4888

Discount Taken

4888-000-56550-4888

Realized Gain Distribution

4888-222-60044-4888

Realized Loss Distribution

4888-222-60044-4888

6. Leave the other defaults and click Save and Close.


7. Click Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

151

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables

Manage Invoice Options


Activity Steps
1. From your Implementation Project, expand Financials > Define Invoicing and
Payments Configuration > Define Payables > Define General Payables
Options.
2. Select Go to Task for Manage Invoice Options and set the scope for your
business unit, XX Canada Business Unit.
3. Select the row for your business unit in the Search Results region.
4. Click Save and Close. The business unit you selected should appear in the
Business Unit field.
5. On the Manage Invoice Options page your business unit should appear under
the page title.
6. Configure the options that are listed in the following table. For the Payment
Terms values, choose your own XX Payment Term.

7. Click Save and Close.

152

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 10: Oracle Fusion Payables

Manage Payment Options


Activity Scope
In this activity you will navigate to the Manage Payment Options task and review the
default payment options for your business unit.
Prerequisites
This activity assumes that the following prerequisite activities have been performed.

Creating an Implementation Project

Defining Business Units

Provision a Data Role

Create a Payment Term

Manage Common Options for Payables and Procurement

Manage Invoice Options

Activity Steps
8. Click the Go to Task icon on the Manage Payment Options task. Your business
unit should appear under the page title.
9. Review the default payment options.
10. Click Save and Close.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

153

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables


Lesson 11: Payments Activities

The following are Activities for Payments:

154

Setting up a disbursement payment file and funds capture file formats, a


transmission configuration, a payment system, and a payment system
account

Setting up an electronic payment method, a payment method defaulting


rule, a payment process file, and a report

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables

Setting Up a Payment System

Background
You want to set up your payment system so you can test the transmission of outbound
electronic payment files.
Activity Scope
You will complete the following tasks:

Set up a disbursement payment file format.

Set up a funds capture settlement file format.

Set up a transmission configuration to transmit outbound electronic payment


files to the payment system.

Set up a payment system and associate it with the disbursement payment file
format you created.

Setup a payment system account.

___________________________________________________________
Selecting the Disbursement Payment File Format to Create:
1. From your Implementation Project, expand Financials > Define Invoicing and
Payments Configuration > Configure Payment System Connectivity
2. Select Go to Task icon for Manage Formats page.
3. From the Type choice list, select Disbursement Payment File Formats.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

155

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables


4. Click Search. You will see all the Payment File Formats.
5. Click the Create button.
6. Enter the following:

Name: XX Disbursements format

Code: XXD Code

BI Publisher Template field: IBYDE_N1US

7. Click the Save and Close > OK.

Selecting the Funds Capture Settlement Format to Create:


1. From the Manage Formats page, select Funds Capture Settlement Format in
the Type choice list.
2. Click the Create button and enter the following:

Name: XX Funds Capture format

Code: XXFC code

BI Publisher Template: IBYDE_N1US

3. Click Save and Close > OK > Done


Selecting the Protocol for the Transmission Configuration:
4. Select Go to Task for Manage Transmission Configurations.
5. From the Search Results table, in the Select Protocol choice list, select File
Transfer Protocol for Static File Names
Note: This drop down is next to the Create button.
6. Click the Create button.
7. From the Create Transmission Configuration page, enter the following:

156

Configuration: XX Payments Training Configuration

Protocol: File Transfer Protocol for Static File Names (appears as read-only).

For the FTP Server IP Address lines Value field, enter Payments
training.oracle.com

For the FTP Account User Name lines Value field, enter Payments
training username

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables

For the FTP Account Password lines Value field, enter Payments training
password123

For the Remote File Directory, enter something, such as /tmp.

For the Sent File Name, enter something, such as /tmp

8. Click the Save and Close button > OK > Done.


Creating a Payment System:
1. Select Go to Task > Manage Payment Systems.
2. Select the Create icon to open the Create Payment Systems page.
3. In the Name field on the Create Payment System page, enter XXPayments
payment system.
4. In the Code field, enter XXps code.
5. In the Funds Capture subregion, select the Credit card and Electronic funds
transfer check boxes.
6. In the Disbursement subregion, select the Electronic funds transfer and
positive pay check box.
7. In the Formats subregion, click the green + (plus) icon and select
XXDisbursements format, which is the disbursement payment file format you
created on the Create Format page.
8. In the Formats subregion, click the green + (plus) icon and select XXFunds
Capture format, which is the funds capture settlement file format you created on
the Create Format page.
9. In the Transmission Protocols subregion, click the green + plus icon and select
File Transfer Protocol for Static File Names.
10. Click the Save and Add Accounts button.
11. Click the OK button.
Creating a Payment System Accounts Page:
1. In the Payment System Accounts region on the Edit Payment System
Accounts page, click the green + (plus) icon and enter Payments payment
system account.
2. Click the Save and Close button.
3. Click the OK button.
4. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

157

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables

Setting Up Payments

Background
For your business unit, you want to set up an electronic payment method with a
defaulting rule to be used with an electronic payment process profile.
You will complete the following tasks:

Set up an electronic payment method with a validation for use with Oracle
Fusion Payables.

Set up a payment method defaulting rule for the electronic payment method.

Set up a payment process profile that is used for a maximum of 5 electronic


payments that are under $1,000.

Set up a report that is automatically submitted to the payment system that


displays the contents of the payment file.

___________________________________________________________
From your XXImplementation Project> Financials folder > Define Invoicing and
Payments Configuration folder > Define Disbursements folder > Manage Payment
Methods task > Go to Task icon > Manage Payment Methods page > Create icon >
Create Payment Method page.
Creating an Electronic Payment Method:
1. In the Name field on the Create Payment Method page, enter XXPayments
payment method.
2. In the Code field, enter XXpm code.

158

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables


3. Select the Usage Rules tab. (The first tab that defaults).
4. Select the Automatically assign payment method to all payees check box.
5. Select the Payables tab.
6. Select the Enable for use in Payables check box.
7. For Business Units, select the Specific radio button.
8. Click the green + (plus) icon, and select the US1 Business Unit.
9. For First Party Legal Entities, select the All radio button.
10. For Payment Process Transaction Types, select the Specific radio button.
11. Click the green + (plus) icon, and select Payables Document from the choice
list.
12. From the Currency choice list, select Foreign and domestic.
13. From the Payee Location choice list, select Foreign and domestic.
14. Select the Validations tab.
15. In the User Defined Validations region, click the green + (plus) icon.
16. From the Field choice list, select Document amount.
17. From the Condition choice list, select Less Than.
18. In the Value field, enter 1000.
19. Click the Save and Close button.
20. Click the OK button.
21. Click the Done button.
Manage Payment Method Defaulting Rules task > Go to Task icon > Manage
Payment Method Defaulting Rules page > Payables region: Create icon > Create
Payment Method Defaulting Rule page.
Creating a Payment Method Defaulting Rule:
1. In the Name field on the Create Payment Method Defaulting Rule page, enter
XXPayments payment method defaulting rule.
2. From the Payment Method choice list, select Electronic.
3. In the Defaulting Conditions region, retain the default settings.
4. Click the Save and Close button.
5. Click the OK button.
6. Click the Done button.
Manage Payment Process Profiles task > Go to Task icon > Manage Payment
Process Profiles page > Create icon > Create Payment Process Profile page.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

159

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables

Creating a Payment Process Profile:


1. In the Name field on the Create Payment Process Profile page, enter
XXPayments payment process profile.
2. In the Code field, enter XXPPP code.
3. From the Payment File Format choice list, select ANSIX12 820 Format.
4. From the Processing Type choice list, select Electronic.
5. From the Payment Confirmation Point choice list, select When the payment
file is formatted.
6. Select the Usage Rules tab.
7. For Payment Methods, select the Specify radio button.
8. Click the green + (plus) icon, and select the payment method you created
previously, XXPayments payment method.
9. For Disbursement Bank Accounts, select the All radio button.
10. For Business Units, select the All radio button.
11. For Currencies, select the All radio button.
12. Select the Payment System tab.
13. From the Payment System choice list, select the payment system you created
previously, XXPayments payment system.
14. Note: Two options that you previously entered, default into the Configuration
Profile field (name of this payment process file plus the name of the payment
system account).
15. In the Payment File Transmission Configuration choice list, select the
payment file transmission configuration you previously created, Payments
Training Configuration.
16. Select the Payment tab.
17. In the Document Grouping Rules region, select the Due date check box.
18. In the Maximum Documents Per Payment field, enter 5.
19. Select the Payment File tab.
20. In the Payment Grouping Rules region, select the Business Unit check box.
21. In the Payment Limits region, from the Currency choice list, select USD - US
Dollar.
22. In the field to the right of the Currency choice list, enter 1000.
23. From the Conversion Rate Type choice list, select Corporate.
24. Select the Reporting tab.

160

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 11: Configuring Oracle Fusion Payments for Payables


25. In the Payment File Register region, from the Format choice list, select
Payment File Register Format.
26. In the Payment File Register region, select the Automatically submit when
payments are confirmed check box.
27. Click the Save and Close button.
28. Click the OK button.
29. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

161

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets


Lesson 12: Assets Activities

The following are activities for Oracle Fusion Assets:

162

Viewing an Asset

Managing Fiscal Years

Managing Asset Calendars

Manage Prorate Conventions

Managing Asset Books

Defining Category Key Flexfield Values

Managing Asset Categories

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Viewing an Asset Demonstration


Background
This demonstration shows the details of an asset in the existing setup for Vision
Corporation.
Activity Scope
This demonstration is instructor-led. Log in using Casey.Brown/Assigned by Instructor.

1. Click Navigator > Fixed Assets > Asset Accounting Dashboard link .
2. Click the Assets link in the task list to open the Inquire Assets page.
3. Click the Book link and select US CORP.
4. Click the Asset Type link and select Capitalized.
5. Click the Search button.
6. In the Search Results region, you see a list of asset numbers and their
corresponding descriptions, asset types, and categories.
7. Select Asset Number 10000.
8. Scroll down to view the Financial Details, including the Book Class and
Prorate Convention.
9. On the Financial Details region within the Books region, select Depreciation
Details to view depreciation for each period based on the specified depreciation
rules.
10. On the Books region, select Transactions from the View menu to view expense
account and location information.
11. When you are finished viewing the asset details, click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

163

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Managing Fiscal Years Activity

Background
You are an asset accounting manager at Vision Corporation and need to define a new
fiscal year according to your company's reporting and tax regulations.
Activity Scope
Create a fiscal year by using the Manage Fiscal Years page from the Setup and
Maintenance work area.

1. Search for Define Fixed Assets Configuration on the All Tasks tab and
expand the folder
2. Click the Go to Task icon in the Manage Fiscal Years row.
3. On the Manage Fiscal Years page, click the Create icon.
4. Enter a unique Name: XX FIS YR (XX will be supplied by the instructor)
5. Enter a unique Description: XX Fiscal Year (XX will be supplied by the
instructor)
6. Click the Add Row icon.
7. Enter a Fiscal Year: 2013 (or current year)
8. Enter a Start Date: 1/1/13 (change to the current fiscal year if other than 2013)
9. Enter an End Date: 12/31/13 (change to the current fiscal year if other than
2013)
10. Enter a Mid Year Start Date: 7/1/13 (change to the current fiscal year if other
than 2013)
11. Click the Save and Close button.
12. Click the Done button.

164

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Managing Asset Calendars Activity

Background
As the asset accounting manager at Vision Corporation, you have defined a fiscal year
and now need to define a new calendar using the fiscal year you just defined.
Activity Scope
Create a monthly calendar by using the Manage Calendars page from the Setup and
Maintenance work area.

1. Click the Go to Task for Manage Asset Calendars.


2. On the Manage Calendars page, click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XX MTH CAL
4. Enter a unique Description: XX Monthly Calendar
5. Select the Fiscal Year Name: Select the fiscal year you set up.
6. Enter the Periods per Year: 12
7. Select the Period Suffix: Calendar
8. Click the Add Row icon in the Periods table..
9. Enter the first period:
Period Name: JAN-13 (Depending on the year you choose to set up.)
Period Number: 1
Start Date: 1/1/13
End Date: 1/31/13
10. Click the Add Row icon to enter another period. Note that the values for Period
Number, Start Date, and End Date have been entered automatically. You only
need to enter the Period Name field: FEB-13.
11. Continue adding periods until you have entered all 12 periods. Checks that the
start and end dates are correct for each of the 12 periods.
12. Click the Save and Close button.
13. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

165

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Managing Prorate Conventions Activity

Background
As the Asset Accounting Manager at Vision Corporation, you now need to define a new
prorate convention using the fiscal year and calendar you just defined.
Activity Scope
Create a Prorate Convention by using the Manage Prorate Conventions page from
the Setup and Maintenance work area.

1. Click the Go to Task for Manage Prorate Conventions.


2. On the Manage Prorate Conventions page, click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XX CAL MT (XX will be supplied by the instructor)
4. Enter a Description: XX Monthly Prorate Calendar (XX will be supplied by the
instructor)
5. Select the Reference Data Set: US1 BU Set
6. Select the Fiscal Year Name: Select the fiscal year you set up.
7. Check the check box Depreciate when Placed in Service.
8. Click the Add Row icon in the Prorates table..
9. Enter the first period (Depending on your chosen year):
Start Date: 1/1/13
End Date: 1/31/13
Prorate Date: 1/1/13
10. Click the Add Row icon to enter another period. Note that the values for next
Period automatically suggests start and end date as well as prorate date
11. Continue adding periods until you have entered all 12 periods. Check that the
start and end dates are correct for each of the 12 periods.
12. Click the Save and Close button.
13. Click the Done button.

166

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Managing Asset Books Activity

Background
You are an asset accounting manager at Vision Corporation and need to define a new
corporate book for your company. The corporate book will store all of your company's
asset information in accordance with statutory requirements and your company's
corporate policy.
Activity Scope
Create a corporate depreciation book by using the Manage Books page from the
Setup and Maintenance work area.

1. Click the Go to Task for Manage Asset Books.


2. On the Manage Asset Books page, click the Create icon.
3. Enter a unique Name: XXUS CORP.
4. Enter a unique Description: XX Vision USA Corporate Book (XX is a unique
numerical identifier that will be assigned by the instructor or your initials).
5. Select a Book Class: Corporate

Note: When you define a corporate book, the name of the corporate book you
are defining is populated automatically into the Associated Corporate Book
field.
6. Select a Ledger: US Primary Ledger
7. Select a Depreciation Calendar: XX MTH CAL (select the calendar you created
earlier).
Note: The Fiscal Year Name is populated automatically.
8. Select a Prorate Calendar: XX MTH CAL (select the calendar you created
earlier).
9. Select the Current PeriodSelect how to Divide Depreciation: Evenly
10. Check the following check boxes:
Depreciate if retire in the first year
Allow amortized changes
Allow cost sign changes
Allow ledger posting

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

167

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets


Accounts Region
Enter the following account information:

Rules Region: Reference Data Groups Tab


Use US1 BU Set Reference Data Set Code for all reference data objects.
Rules Region: Group Rules Tab
1. Check all check boxes in this region.
2. Click the Save and Close button.
3. Click the Done button.

168

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Defining Category Key Flexfield Values Activity

Background
You are the asset accounting manager for Vision Corporation and your manager has
requested that you add a category for Office Supplies with a minor category of Printer.
Activity Scope
Create a major and minor category value by using the Manage Fixed Assets Key
Flexfields page from the Setup and Maintenance work area.
1. Click the Go to Task in the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields row.
2. On the Manage Fixed Assets Key Flexfields page, click the Search button.
3. Highlight the Category Flexfield row and click the Manage Structure Instances
button.
4. On the Manage Key Flexfield Structure Instances page, click the Search
button.
5. Select the name Category and click the Edit icon.
6. To add a major category value, click the FA_MAJOR_CATEGORY hyperlink.
7. On the Manage Value Sets page, click the Manage Values button.
8. On the Manage Values page, click the Search button to view a list of the major
category values that have already been defined in the Search Results region.
Note that XX OFFICE SUPPLIES is not currently in the list (XX is a unique
numerical identifier that will be assigned by the instructor).
9. Click the Create icon.
10. On the Create Value page, enter XX OFFICE SUPPLIES in the Value field.
11. Enter XX Office Supplies in the Description field.
12. Click the Save and Close button. Note that XX OFFICE SUPPLIES now appears
in the Search Results.
13. You will now create a minor category value. On the Manage Values page, click
the Done button.
14. On the Manage Value Sets page, click the Save and Close button.
15. On the Edit Key Flexfield Structure Instance page, click the
FA_MINOR_CATEGORY hyperlink.
16. On the Manage Value Sets page, click the Manage Values button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

169

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets


17. On the Manage Values page, click the Create icon.
18. On the Create Value page, enter XX PRINTER in the Value field (XX is a unique
numerical identifier that will be assigned by the instructor).
19. Enter XX Printer in the Description field.
20. Select XX OFFICE SUPPLIES in the Independent Value field.
21. Click the Save and Close button. XX PRINTER now appears in the Search
Results.
22. Click the Done or Save and Close button until you return to the Setup and
Maintenance Overview page.

170

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

Managing Asset Categories Activity


Background
You are the asset accounting manager for Vision Corporation. You created category
values and now need to define a category with a major category of Office Supplies and
a minor category of Printer.
Activity Scope
Create a category by using the Manage Asset Category page from the Setup and
Maintenance work area.
1. Click the Go to Task in the Manage Asset Categories row.(Last Row)
2. On the Manage Asset Category page, click the Create icon.
3. On the Create Category page, select a Major Category: XX OFFICE
SUPPLIES (this is the major category value you created earlier)
4. Select a Minor Category: XX PRINTER (this is the minor category value you
created earlier)
5. Enter a Description: Printer
6. Accept the default Category Type: Non-lease
7. Accept the default Ownership: Owned
8. Select the Property Type: Personal
9. Select the Property Class: 1245 property
10. Check the following check boxes:

Capitalized Enabled In physical inventory


1. In the Books region, click the Add Row icon.
2. Select a Book: XXUS CORP
3. On the Accounts tab, enter the following account information:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

171

Lesson 12: Oracle Fusion Assets

4. On the Default Rules tab, click the Add Row icon.


5. Select a Method: STL
6. Select the Life in Years: 5
7. Select the Life in Months: 0
8. Select a Prorate Convention: XX CAL MT
9. Select a Retirement Convention: XX CAL MT
10. Enter a Default Salvage Percent: 10
11. Click the Save and Close button.
12. Click the Done button.

172

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


Lesson 13: Expenses Activities

The following are Activities for Expenses:

Creating an Expense Template

Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate Demonstration

Viewing a Conversion Rate Warning and Error

Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration

Creating a Corporate Card Program

Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

173

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Creating an Expense Template

Background
You are implementing Expenses in your company. You are creating the expense types
that are applicable to each business unit.
Activity Scope
You will complete the following tasks:

Create an expense template with four expense types.

Define the expense types permitted to be itemized for the itemization-required


expense type Hotel.

Use the expense types in an expense report.

Navigate to the Create Expense Template page as follows:


1. From your Implementation Project, expand Financials > Define Expenses
Configuration > Define Expense Policies and Rules
2. Click the Go to Task icon for Manage Expense Report Templates
3. Click the Create icon to create a new expense report template.
Entering Header Information for a New Expense Template:
1. On the Create Expense Template page, in the Name field, enter XXTemplate.
2. In the Effective Start Date field, enter todays date.
174

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


3. From the Business Unit choice list, select US1 Business Unit.
4. Click the Save button.
Creating an Expense Type for Domestic Airfare:
5. On the Create Expense Template page, select the Expense Types tab.
6. Click the Create icon. The Create Expense Type dialog box appears.
7. In the Name field, enter Domestic Airfare.
8. From the Category choice list, select Airfare.
9. From the Account choice list, select 60500 (travel expense) .
10. From the Receipt Requirements tab, click the define amount required radio
buttons.
11. In the Receipt Required Above field, enter 0 (zero) for both cash expense
lines and corporate card expense lines.

12. Click the Save and Create Another button.


Creating an Expense Type for Room Charge:
13. In the Name field of the Create Expense Type dialog box, enter Room Charge.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

175

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


14. From the Category choice list, select Accommodations.
15. From the Account choice list, select 60500 (travel expense).
16. Select the This expense type used in itemization only check box. NOTE: This
expense type is now only available for an expense type that is required to be
itemized.
17. Click the Save and Create Another button.
Creating an Expense Type for Internet:
18. In the Name field of the Create Expense Type dialog box, enter Internet.
19. From the Category choice list, select Miscellaneous.
20. From the Account choice list, select 60500 (travel expense).
21. Select the This expense type used in itemization only check box. NOTE: This
expense type is now only available for an expense type that is required to be
itemized.
22. Click the Save and Create Another button.
Creating an Expense Type for Hotel:
23. In the Name field of the Create Expense Type dialog box, enter Hotel.
24. From the Category choice list, select Accommodations.
25. From the Account choice list, select 60500 (travel expense).
26. From the Receipt Requirement tab, click the define amount required radio
buttons.
27. In the Receipt Required Above field, enter 0 (zero) for both cash expense
lines and corporate card expense lines.
28. Select the Itemization tab.
29. From the Itemization choice list, select Required. NOTE: This expense type,
Hotel, is now required to be itemized.
30. Confirm that the expense types you created for Room Charge and Internet
appear in the table on the Itemization tab.
31. Select the Include check boxes for both the Room Charge and the Internet
expense types. NOTE: These two expense types are now available as itemizable
expense types.
32. Click the Save and Close button.

176

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


Creating Corporate Card Mapping for Airfare and Hotel:
33. Click on the Card Expense Type Mapping Tab.

34. Select the Enable Corporate Card Mapping checkbox.


35. Select Domestic Airfare for Default Expense Type.
36. For Card Expense Type of Air, select Expense Type of Domestic Airfare.
37. For Card Expense Type of Hotel, select Expense Type of Hotel. Select the
Automatic Itemization checkbox.
38. Click the Save and Close button.Click the Done button.
Confirming that Newly Created Expense Types Appear in the Newly Created
Expense Template:
1. Login with user name: casey.brown.
2. From the Navigator menu, click the Expenses link under the My Information
menu. The Expenses work area appears.
3. Click the Create Report button. The Create Expense Report page appears.
4. In the Create Expense Report page, click the Create Expense Item button. The
Create Expense Item dialog box appears.
5. In the Date field, enter todays date.
6. From the Expense Template choice list, select the expense template that you
created.
7. From the Expense Type choice list, confirm that you see the Domestic Airfare
and Hotel expense types that you created.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

177

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


8. From the Expense Type choice list, select Hotel. Notice that the Itemize button
is now enabled because you specified that the Hotel expense type is required to
be itemized.
9. Click the Itemize button.
10. Click the Add Line button to create a new line.
11. View the Expense Type choice list. You will see the two expense types of Room
Charge and Internet that you previously defined as itemizable expense types.
12. Click the Cancel button as we will not create an expense report in this stage.
13. Click Cancel again to return to the Expenses work area.

178

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Setting Warning and Error Limits on a Conversion Rate


Demonstration

Purpose of demonstration:

You are setting a warning limit on the conversion rate. If users enter a conversion
rate that is 5-10% higher than the default conversion rate, they will see a
Warning.

You are setting an error limit on the conversion rate. If users enter a conversion
rate that is more than 10% higher than the default conversion rate, they will see
an Error.

Login: Use your username.


Navigate to the Manage Conversion Rates and Policies page as follows:
1.

From your Implementation Project, expand Financials > Define Expenses


Configuration > Define Expense Policies and Rules

2.

Click the Go to Task icon for Manage Conversion Rates and Policies.

3.

Click the US1 Business Unit link.

4.

In the Edit Conversion Rates and Policies: US1 Business Unit dialog box,
perform the following steps:

Ensure that the Default conversion rate check box is selected.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

179

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

5.

6.

180

In the Warning Tolerance Percentage field, enter 5.

Select the Display warning to user check box.

In the Error Tolerance Percentage field, enter 10.

In the Individual Currency Exceptions region, perform the following steps:

Click the green + (plus) icon to create a row.

From the Currency choice list, select MXN - Mexican Peso

In the Warning Tolerance Percentage field, enter 10.

In the Display Warning to User column, select the check box.

In the Error Tolerance Percentage field, enter 15.

Click the Save and Close button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Viewing a Conversion Rate Policy Warning and Error

Background
During your business trip to the UK, you took a taxi ride and paid for it by using your
personal Visa credit card. After returning, you are entering your expenses. You notice
that a different conversion rate was applied to the taxi expense by Visa than the one
used by your company.
Activity Scope
You will complete the following tasks:

View a conversion rate warning.

View a conversion rate error.

Viewing a Warning for a Conversion Rate Used in an Expense Report:


1.

Login with user: Casey.Brown.

2.

From the Navigator menu, click the Expenses link under the My Information
menu.

3.

In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create
Expense Report page appears.

4.

Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box
appears.

5.

In the Date field, enter today's date.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

181

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


6.

Select Expense template Expenses US1

7.

From the Expense Type choice list, select Taxi.

8.

From the Amount choice list , select GBP - Pound Sterling and enter 100.
NOTE: GBP may be near the top of the choice list, rather than in alphabetical
order.

9.

In the Conversion Rate field, change the conversion rate from 1.582 to 1.70.

10.

In the Expense Location field, enter San Francisco, San Francisco,


California, United States.

11.

NOTE: You will see a yellow warning that surrounds the Conversion Rate field,
which indicates the conversion rate you entered of 1.70 is 5% or more above the
allowable limit of 1.582. For entering the conversion rate of 1.70, which resulted
in a warning, you are required to enter a justification.

12.

In the Justification field, enter the following justification: Conversion rate


applied by Visa.

13.

Click the Save and Create Another button.

Viewing an Error for a Conversion Rate Used in an Expense Report:

182

14.

In the Date field on the Create Expense Item dialog box, enter today's date.

15.

From the Expense Type choice list, select Lunch.

16.

From the Amount choice list , select GBP - Pound Sterling and enter 100.

17.

In the Conversion Rate field, change the conversion rate to 1.80.

18.

Confirm that the Expense Location choice list shows San Francisco.

19.

Click the Save and Close button.

20.

NOTE: You will receive a red error that surrounds the Conversion Rate field,
which indicates that the conversion rate you entered of 1.80 is 10% or more
above the allowable limit of 1.582.

21.

TIP: If you do not see the error message, click the Save and Close button and
then submit the expense report. You will then see a message that indicates that
you cannot submit an expense report with errors. You will note a red error icon
on the line. Click the expense item link and then you will see the error that was
not showing previously.

22.

Click the Save and Close button. Note that Expenses will not let you submit the
expense.

23.

In the Conversion Rate field, change the conversion rate to 1.65, which is less
than 1.70 for which you received a warning.

24.

Click the Save and Close button.

25.

Note that the amounts in the Reimbursable Amount column on the Create
Expense Report page update correctly.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Modifying Approval Rules Demonstration

Purpose of this demonstration: To demonstrate that companies can create or


modify approval rules to implement their expense report policies.

Instructor: In this instructor-led demonstration, modify the following two


predefined approval rules that represent the company policy.

Expense reports with report total = < $1,000 is automatically approved.

Expense reports with report total > = $1,000 requires one level of
supervisory approval.

You will modify the preceding predefined rules to reflect the following changes:
1.

Expense reports with report total = < $1,000 is automatically approved.

2.

Expense reports with report total > $1,000 and < = $2,000 requires one level of
supervisory approval.

3.

Expense reports with report total > $2,000 requires two levels of supervisory
approval.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

183

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


Demonstration Steps:

To configure approval rules, navigate to the BPM Worklist application as follows:

Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: Task Lists and
Tasks > Name field: Manage Expense Approval Rules > Search button > Manage
Expenses Approval rules > Go to Task icon > BPM Worklist application.

Modifying an Existing Approval Rule to Add a New Condition That Requires


a Single Level of Supervisory Approval for a Report Total Greater Than $1,000
and Equal to or Less Than $2,000
1. Login: Use your username.
2. From the Tasks to be configured pane, select the
FinExmWorkflowExpenseApproval task.
3. To define and modify rules, click the Edit (pencil) icon on the icon tool bar to
make the rule editable.

184

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


4. Click on Assignees

5. Click on Switch to Vertical Layout.


6. Click on SoaOLabel.ExpenseReportOwnerRoutingParticipants (shown below)

7. At the bottom of the page, you will see Expense ExpenseReportOwnerRuleSet


hyperlink. Click on the hyperlink (not on the edit button).
Click on the ExpenseReportRuleSet

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

185

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

8. Expand the predefined rule.


9. In the Toadd a new blank condition, click on the green + sign.

10. Expand the new rule

11.
12. In the left-most field of the new condition, click the LOV search icon to select the
report attribute.
13. Expand the Task folder.
14. Expand the payload folder.

186

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


15. Expand the getExpenseReportVOResponse folder.
16. Expand the result folder.
17. Select the expenseReportTotal folder.
18. Click the OK button.
19. In the middle field, select same or less than from the choice list.
20. In the right-most field, enter 2000. Now you have modified the existing rule by
adding a condition that requires a single level of supervisory approval for
expense reports with a report total > $1000 and < = $2,000.
21. Collapse the rule you just modified.
Adding a New Approval Rule That Requires Two Levels of Supervisory Approval
for a Report Total Greater Than $2,000
22. Click the Plus (Add Rule) icon choice list to the right of the View choice list,
select Add Rule.
23. Expand the new rule. It has blank IF and THEN regions.
24. In the rule name field, enter Report Total over 2000.
25. In the IF region, click the LOV search icon in the left-most field.
26. Expand the Task folder.
27. Expand the payload folder.
28. Expand the getExpenseReportVOResponse folder.
29. Expand the result folder.
30. Select the expenseReportTotal folder.
31. Click the OK button.
32. From the middle list, select more than.
33. In the far-most right field, enter 2000. You have now defined the condition for
expense reports over $2,000.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

187

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


34. In the THEN region, from the Plus icon choice list, select Add Approver ->
Supervisory. Now you can add levels to the hierarchy.
35. For the Response Type, select the Required radio button.
36. In the Number of Levels field, enter 2.
37. Click the LOV search icon for the Starting Participant field. The Add Hierarchy
Participant dialog box appears.
38. Select the Get Manager radio button.
39. From the List Builder list, select Supervisory.
40. In the Reference User field, enter Task.creator. NOTE: Task.creator means
the expense report submitter.
41. Click the OK button.
42. Click the LOV search icon for the Top Participant. The Add Hierarchy
Participant dialog box appears.
43. Select the Get User radio button.
44. In the Reference User field, enter "Samuel.Mabry" as the name of the highest
person in the supervisory hierarchy.
45. Click the OK button. You have completed the approval hierarchy definition for
reports over $2,000.
46. Click the Save icon in the icon toolbar.
47. Click the OK button.
48. Click the Commit icon in the icon toolbar.

Please skip the following activity for this class.

188

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


Reviewing the Approver List to Confirm Changes to the Approval Rules
1. Login: Use your username.
2. You will create two expense reports, one with a report total of 1,500 USD and
another with a report total of 2,500 USD and submit for approval.
Creating an Expense Report with an Expense Item of $1,500

Navigator menu > My Information menu > Expenses link > Expenses work area.
1. In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create
Expense Report page appears.
2. In the Purpose field, enter report total equals 1500.
3. Select the I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies
check box.
4. Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box
appears.
5. From the Expense Type choice list, select Car Rental.
6. From the Amount choice list, select USD - US Dollar.
7. To the right of the Amount choice list, enter 1500.
8. In the Merchant Name field, enter Hertz.
9. Click the Save and Close button.
10. Click the Submit button.
11. Click the OK button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

189

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


Confirming the Modified Approval Rule for Expense Reports Greater Than $1,000
and Equal to or Less Than $2,000
1. Click the Pending Approval tab.
2. Click the Expense Report Number link for the expense report number that you
noted above. TIP: The most recent expense report link is always the one at the
bottom of the table.
Alternatively, you can copy the expense report number from the message and
paste it into the Query by Example (QBE) field for the expense report. To
enable the QBE functionality, click the QBE icon and a row of fields display
above the table.
3. Click the Approver List link. The Approver List hierarchy displays.
4. Note the approver listed in the Expense Report Approval Stage.
5. Click the OK button.
6. Click the Done button.
Creating an Expense Report with an Expense Item of $2,500

Navigator menu > My Information menu > Expenses link > Expenses work area.
1. In the Expenses work area, click the Create Report button. The Create
Expense Report page appears.
2. In the Purpose field, enter report total equals 2500.
3. Select the I have read and accept the corporate travel and expense policies
check box.
4. Click the Create Expense Item button. The Create Expense Item dialog box
appears.
5. From the Expense Type choice list, select Car Rental.
6. From the Amount choice list, select USD - Dollar.
7. To the right of the Amount choice list, enter 2500.
8. In the Merchant Name field, enter Hertz.

190

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


9. Click the Save and Close button.
10. Click the Submit button.
11. Note the confirmation expense report number.
12. Click the OK button.
Confirming the New Approval Rule for Expense Reports Greater Than $2,000
1. Click the Pending Approval tab.
2. Click the Expense Report link of the expense report number that you noted
above. TIP: The most recent expense report link is always the one at the bottom
of the table.
Alternatively, you can copy the expense report number from the message
and paste it into the Query by Example (QBE) field for the expense report. To
enable the QBE functionality, click the QBE icon and a row of fields display
above the table.
3. Click the Approver List link. The Approver List hierarchy displays.
4. Note the approver listed in the Expense Report Approval Stage.
5. Click the OK button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

191

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Creating a Corporate Card Program

Background
Your company has chosen American Express as your corporate card issuer. You are
ready to start processing corporate card transaction files. To enable the processing, you
will set up the applicable entities.
Activity Scope
You will complete the following tasks:
1.

Define a corporate card mapping rule.

2.

Create a corporate card program and company account number with American
Express.

3.

Assign the mapping rule to the corporate card program to enable the upload
process to derive corporate card expense types for the corporate card
transactions.

Creating a Corporate Card Mapping Rule


A corporate card mapping rule enables you to assign a corporate card expense
type to the transactions based on the transaction codes in the corporate card
transaction file. Once the corporate card expense type is derived using the mapping
rule, the corporate card expense type is converted to a user-defined expense type. This

192

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


expense type is derived using the corporate card expense type mapping in the default
expense template.
NOTE: Only those corporate card transactions with associated expense types are
displayed in the Expenses work area.
Login: Use your username.
Navigate to the Manage Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rules page as
follows:
Setup and Maintenance work area > Implementation Projects tab > Tasks pane:
Manage Implementation Projects link > XX Implementation project link > Financials
folder > Define Expenses Configuration folder > Define Credit Card Data folder >
Manage Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rules task > Go to Task icon >
Manage Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rules page.
NOTE: For the exercise below, XX will be assigned by the instructor.

1.

On the Manage Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rules page, click the
Create icon. The Create Corporate Card Expense Type Mapping Rule dialog
box appears.

2.

In the Name field, enter XXMapping Rule.

3.

From the Source Lookup Type choice list, select MIS Industry Codes. MIS
Industry Codes is a lookup that contains the American Express corporate card
transaction codes that describe the type of transactions in the corporate card
transaction file.

4.

From the Default Card Expense Type choice list, select Miscellaneous.

5.

Map the Source Lookup Codes to the following corporate card expense
types:

6.

From the Card Expense Type choice list for Source Lookup Code 01, select
Air.

7.

From the Card Expense Type choice list for Source Lookup Code 03, select
Hotel.

8.

From the Card Expense Type choice list for Source Lookup Code 05, select
Meal.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

193

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


9.

From the Card Expense Type choice list for Source Lookup Code 08, select
Miscellaneous.

10.

Click the Save and Close button.

11.

Click the Done button.

Creating a Corporate Card Program and Company Accounts


A corporate card program represents your agreement with the card issuer, your
organization setup within the card issuer system, and the payment liability.
Navigate to the Create Corporate Card Program page as follows:
Setup and Maintenance work area > Implementation Projects tab > Tasks pane:
Manage Implementation Projects link > XX Implementation Project link >
Financials folder > Define Expenses Configuration folder > Define Expense
Policies and Rules folder > Define Credit Card Data > Manage Corporate Card
Programs task > Go to Task icon > Manage Corporate Card Programs page.

194

1.

In the Manage Corporate Card Programs page, click the Create icon. The
Create Corporate Card Program page appears.

2.

In the Name field, enter: XXAMEX.

3.

In the Description field, enter XXAmerican Express Travel Card.

4.

From the Card Type choice list, select Travel.

5.

From the Card Brand choice list, select American Express.

6.

Select the Upload Rules tab.

7.

From the File Format choice list, select American Express KR1025.

8.

From the Employee Matching Rule for New Cards choice list, select
Employee number.

9.

In the Card Expense Type Mapping Region, select XXMapping Rule from the
Transaction Summary Mapping Rule choice list. NOTE: This is the mapping
rule that you created previously.

10.

From the Transaction Summary Source Column choice list, select MIS
industry code.

11.

In the Company Accounts region, click the Create icon. The Create Company
Account dialog box appears.

12.

In the Company Account Name field, enter XXCompany Account.

13.

In the Company Account Number field, enter XX1000.

14.

In the Market Code field, enter 001.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses


15.

In the Requesting Control Account Number field, enter XX2000.

16.

From the Card Issuer choice list, select American Express.

17.

From the Card Issuer Site choice list, select US1 Business Unit.

18.

From the Payables Business Unit choice list, select US1 BU.

19.

From the Payment Currency choice list, select: USD US Dollar.

20.

From the Payment Terms choice list, select Immediate.

21.

From the Payment Option choice list, select Both.

22.

In the Expense Clearing Account field, enter 101.10.22190.000.000.000.


NOTE: If you receive an error message, click the Expense Clearing Account
icon and search for any missing segments in the Expense Clearing Account
dialog box.

23.

Click the Save and Close button.

24.

To exit the page, click the Save and Close button.

25.

Click the Done button.


HINT: If Card Issuer Site, Payment Terms, and Expense Clearing Account are
grayed out, please try to Save. The system will throw an error and ungray the
fields.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

195

Lesson 13: Oracle Fusion Expenses

Setting Up a Corporate Card Usage Policy Warning Demonstration

Purpose of demonstration: To demonstrate how to set up a warning to enforce


corporate card usage.
Navigate to the Manage Corporate Card Usage Policies page as follows:
Setup and Maintenance work area > Implementation Projects tab > Tasks pane:
Manage Implementation Projects link > XX Implementation Project link >
Financials folder > Define Expenses Configuration folder > Define Credit Card Data
folder > Manage Corporate Card Usage Policies task > Go to Task icon > Manage
Corporate Card Usage Policies page.

196

1.

In the Manage Corporate Card Usage Policies page, click the US1 Business
Unit link.

2.

In the Edit Corporate Card Usage Policy: US1 Business Unit dialog box, enter
a Cash Limit of 100 for Airfare.

3.

In the Warning Tolerance Percentage field for Airfare, enter 0 (zero).

4.

For Airfare, select the Display Warning to User check box.

5.

Click the Save and Close button.

6.

To exit the page, click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


Lesson 14: Receivables Activities

The following activities are for Oracle Fusion Receivables:

Receivables System Options

Implementing SmartReceipts

Manage AutoMatch Rule Sets

Manage Receipt Application Exception Rules

Manage AutoCash Rule Sets

Receivables System Options

Manage Lockbox

Customer Profile Class

Applying a Receipt to a Transaction

Defining a Profile Class

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

197

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Activity Introduction: Receivables System Options Demonstration

Background
Demonstrate navigating the Receivables System Options page and setting required
system options to configure the Receivables environment.

Activity Scope
1. Log in as Your User.
2. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select Task
lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define Receivables
Configuration > Manage Receivables System Options: Go to Task icon
3. In the Manage Receivables System Options row, click the Go to Task icon.
4. Click the search button
5. In the Manage Receivables System Options page, select US1 Business Unit
and click the Search button.
6. Click the US1 Business Unit hyperlink.
7.

Click the Billing and Revenue tab if it is not already selected.

8.

Click the Require salesperson check box.

9. In the Tax Account field, enter the tax account to use on transactions when no
tax account is provided.
10. In the Days per Posting Cycle field, enter 20.
11. In the Tax Invoice Printing Options field, select Itemize Taxes.
12. In the Document Number Generation Level field, select When saved.
13. Click the Assess late charges check box.
14. In the Grouping Rule field, select Default.
15. In the Maximum Memory in Bytes field, enter 102400.
16. In the Log File Message Level field, enter 0.
17. Click the Cash Processing tab.
18. In the Application Rule Set field, select Line And Tax Prorate.
19. Click the Use AutoApply check box.
20. In the Chargeback Due Date field, enter Entered date.

198

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


21. In the Realized Gains Account field, enter your designated general ledger
account.
22. In the Invoices per Commit field, enter 100.
23. In the Receipts per Commit field, enter 100.
24. Click the Save button.

Implementing SmartReceipts
Background
Fusion Receivables continues to support Autolockbox, but has enhanced the ability to
apply receipts automatically. The new SmartReceipts functionality is rooted in the
AutoApply process and leverages a number of setup points. It should be noted that the
functionality can be leveraged by AutoLockbox and has been extended to receipts
created manually or through Excel uploads.
Note: When creating new setup, please use your initials in the values assigned to
prevent conflicts with your fellow classmates. In addition, everyone will be looking at
the System Options for US1 Business Unit. Please do not save any changes when
looking at or evaluating this setup. This will prevent you from conflicting with your
classmates.
When implementing Fusion Receivables and depending on your requirements, you may
need to configure, or update the defaults for, various setups related to receipts:

Define AutoCash Rules

Define Application Rules

Define AutoMatch Rules

Define Receipt Application Exception Rules

Implementation Considerations for Lockbox

Review Receivables System Options


1. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select
Task lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define
Receivables Configuration > Manage Receivables System Options: Go to
Task icon

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

199

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


2. Select US1 Business Unit and select Search.

3. Click on the US1 Business Unit hyperlink to review the setup.

4. Select Cash Processing tab and review related cash processing settings.
These are the primary drivers of the SmartReceipts functionality that are used by
the AutoApply processes.
AutoApply
The Use AutoApply option is enabled when you want to use AutoApply to process
receipts for the business unit. This applies to manually entered receipts, receipts
created through Excel upload (ADFdi integration) and receipts created through
lockbox processing. AutoApply attempts to process receipts even when there is
invalid or only partial information available to match receipts to transactions. The
AutoApply process matches transactions to receipts and either applies receipts
automatically or presents transaction recommendations for receipt application to you
for manual processing.
If you enable the Use AutoApply option, you can use an AutoMatch rule set to help
define how to match customers to receipts and receipts to transactions to complete
receipt processing.
Use the Days to AutoApply a Receipt field to specify the number of days that
AutoApply attempts to apply a receipt to a transaction. Use this field if your
customers often pay for transactions before they are created. AutoApply looks for
and attempts to apply open receipts for the number of days that you specify. If you
do not enter a value in this field, AutoApply tries to apply the receipt only once.
Important: If you do not enable AutoApply, and if you do not set up an AutoCash
rule set to indicate how to apply receipts, then Receivables leaves all receipts that

200

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


you create unapplied.
AutoMatch Rule Set: The AutoMatch rule set provides information that is used by
AutoApply to complete the process of applying receipts to transactions. The settings
in the AutoMatch rule set provide these recommendations:
Customer recommendations: The matching process recommends
customers for lockbox receipts that have invalid or missing customer
information.
Transaction recommendations: The matching process recommends one or
more transactions for receipt application for both lockbox and manual
receipts.
AutoCash Rule Set (optional): Use an AutoCash rule set to indicate how to apply
receipts to transactions in cases where there is no transaction reference available
for the receipt. Receivables first looks for the AutoCash rule set defined for the
customer profile either at the customer site or customer level to apply the receipt.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

201

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Manage AutoMatch Rule Sets


1. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select
Task lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define
Receivables Configuration > Define Customer Payments > Manage
AutoMatch Rule Sets: Go to Task icon.

An AutoMatch rule set helps to complete the process of applying receipts to


transactions. The settings include these recommendations:
Customer recommendations: The matching process recommends
customers for lockbox receipts that have invalid or missing customer
information. If the customer information is missing, it cannot create a
customer recommendation.
Transaction recommendations: The matching process recommends one or
more transactions for receipt application for both lockbox and manual receipts
if the match(es) is/are not within the defined threshold.

AutoMatch Threshold Settings


The AutoMatch threshold settings have the following meaning:
Customer Recommendation Threshold: The qualifying percentage
necessary to add customer information to a receipt. If the calculated score for
a customer account number is above this threshold, then the AutoApply
process adds this customer information to the receipt. The system will provide
recommended matches if it does not find a match within the threshold.

202

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Minimum Match Threshold: The qualifying percentage necessary to define


the relative importance of customer, transaction and amount matches when
deciding the final match score. If the calculated score for one or more
transactions is above this threshold, the AutoApply process recommends the
transactions for receipt application, in order of the highest percentage match.
NOTE: The minimum match threshold must be less than the customer
recommendation threshold and the combined weighted threshold.
Combined Weighted Threshold: The qualifying percentage necessary for
the AutoApply process to apply a receipt to a transaction automatically. This
percentage is the sum (always 100%) of the qualifying percentages defined
for the supplied customer information, transaction information, and actual
transaction amount that is considered for receipt matching.
Days of Closed Invoices Threshold: Determines which closed
transactions to include in the AutoMatch process. All transactions that were
closed on or before the number of days provided as the threshold value are
considered for application or recommendation.

AutoMatch Calculation
The threshold qualifying percentages defined in the AutoMatch rule set are
compared to the resulting scores of each customer account number or
transaction number that is analyzed by the matching process.
The matching process derives a recommendation in this way:
1. If applicable, remove characters and spaces from the number as defined
by the AutoMatch rule set string handling.
2. Apply the formula (Levenshtein algorithm) to the resulting string to obtain
the score. This formula is:
1 - (number of changes required to make the recommended string match
the provided string / length of the larger string)
3. Compare the resulting score to the applicable threshold.
For example, transaction number 10010 is provided by lockbox for a receipt
application. This number does not exist, but Receivables finds the number
AR10001. The recommendation for this number is calculated in this way:
1. The AutoMatch rule set string handling settings indicate that the first two
characters are to be removed from a string under consideration.
Receivables removes AR, leaving the number 10001.
2. It will take one change for 10001 to match 10010. Therefore, the score for
this match is (1 - 1/5) = 80%.
3. The 80% score exceeds the Combined Weighted Threshold value of 70%,
so the receipt is automatically applied to transaction AR10001.
4. To create a new AutoMatch rule, select the Create icon.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

203

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


5. Specify the following:
Set: US1 BU Set
Name: AutoMatch XX (where XX represent your initials)
Description: AutoMatch XX
Customer Recommendation Threshold: 95
Minimum Match Threshold: 75
Combined Weighted Threshold: 95
Days of Closed Invoices Threshold: 30
Combined Weighted Threshold Details
Define the relative importance of customer, transaction and amount matches.
Customer Weight: 20
Transaction Weight: 70
Amount Weight: 10
Amount Weight Exceptions
Define the exceptions to consider for amount weight.
Net of Tax Weight: 70
Net of Tax and Freight Weight: 70
Net of Freight Weight: 80
Unearned Discount Weight: 60
You will not be setting up any string handling, but you can use this to have
AutoMatch ignore values of either the transaction or the remittance reference
values when comparing the value for a match.
Select Save and Close > Done.
Note: Additional explanations can be found in the Fusion Application Help.

204

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Manage Receipt Application Exception Rules


1. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select
Task lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define
Receivables Configuration > Define Customer Payments > Manage Receipt
Application Exception Rules: Go to Task icon.

Use Receipt Application Exception Rules to manage remaining amounts after


SmartReceipts/AutoApply, which can be from manual receipts, Excel uploaded
receipts, and lockbox receipts.
The AutoApply process uses the details of the Receipt Application Exception
Rules either to process overpayments and underpayments automatically or to
present overpayments and underpayments for user review and manual
adjustment:
If there is an overpayment, the application exception rule indicates
whether to refund the amount to the customer, place the amount on
account, write off the amount, or leave the amount unapplied.
If there is an underpayment, the application exception rule indicates
whether to allow write off of the remaining open balance amount on the
transaction.
Exception Rules
Each exception rule in Receipt Application Exception Rules consists of a
condition, the amount and percentage that apply to the condition, and the action
to take when this condition arises:
The Action field contains the receivables activities that you have defined
for Adjustment, Receipt Write-off, or Refund.
The underpayment or overpayment amount is accounted for in the general
ledger accounts belonging to the applicable receivables activity.
The User Review Required option indicates whether the action is
processed automatically or requires manual review and approval.
Exception Rule Example: Over Payment >= 100 Refund
This means that after the receipt is applied, if the remaining overpayment is greater than $100,
then a refund will be generated.
Exception Rule Example: Under Payment < 5 Write-off

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

205

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


This means that if a receipt application results in an underpayment of less than $5, then the
remaining amount will be automatically written off unless User review is required.

2. To set up a new rule, select the Create icon.


3. Specify the following:
Set: Common Set
Name: Default Exception Rule XX
Description: XX Default Receipt Application Exception Rule
4. Select the Add row icon and specify the following:
Condition: Overpayment greater than or equal to
Amount: 10
Percentage: 0
Action: On Account
User Review Required: Yes
Note: Selecting User Review Required means that AutoApply will create a
recommendation for the user to review before actually putting the amount on
account. The user can accept the recommendation or choose to apply the
remaining amount to another transaction or take other actions as needed.
5. Select the Add row icon and specify the following:
Condition: Overpayment less than
Amount: 10
Percentage: 0
Action: Adjustment
User Review Required: No
6. Select the Add row icon and specify the following:
Condition: Overpayment less than
Amount: 3
Percentage: 0
Action: Receipt Write Off
User Review Required: Not Selected
7. Select Save and Close > Done.

206

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Manage AutoCash Rule Sets


1. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select Task
lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define Receivables
Configuration > Define Common Accounts Receivable Configuration >
Manage AutoCash Rule Sets: Go to Task icon.
Note: Setup is relatively self-explanatory and the feature is brought forward from
Oracle E-Business Suite R12.
During payment processing, Oracle Fusion Receivables uses the Match
Receipts By rules to attempt to match receipts to open transactions, and either
apply receipts automatically or present recommendations for receipt application.
If transactions cannot be matched or transaction information is not available,
Receivables uses the AutoCash rule set defined for the customer profile either at
the customer site or customer level to apply the receipt. If the customer does not
have an AutoCash rule set assigned to a profile, Receivables uses the AutoCash
rule set assigned to system options and the number of discount grace days
defined in the customer site or customer profile to apply the receipt.
If none of the rules in the AutoCash rule set apply, Receivables places the
remaining amount either unapplied or on-account, depending on the setting of
the Remaining Remittance Amount option on the AutoCash rule set.

The general settings are:


Discount: Specify whether to calculate earned or unearned discounts on
receipt applications.
Late Charges: Indicate whether to include late charges in the open balance
calculation.
Items in Dispute: Indicate whether to include items in dispute in the open
balance calculation.
Remaining Remittance Amount: Indicate how to save remittance amounts
from partial payment applications: as unapplied or on account.
Enter the rules to use in the rule set, and the order in which Receivables should use
them to apply receipts. The five available rules are:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

207

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Match Payment with Invoice: This rule applies a receipt to a single invoice,
debit memo, or chargeback only if the receipt amount exactly matches the
amount of the debit item.
Clear the Account: This rule applies a receipt only if the receipt amount
exactly matches the customer open balance.
Clear Past Due Invoices: This rule applies a receipt only if the receipt
amount exactly matches the customer past due account balance.
Clear Past Due Invoices Grouped by Payment Terms: This rule applies a
receipt only if the receipt amount exactly matches the sum of the customer
credit memos and past due invoices.
Apply to the Oldest Invoice First: This rule applies receipts to customer
debit and credit items, starting with the item with the oldest due date.
2. To create a new AutoCash Rule Set, select the Create icon and enter the
following:

Name: XX Oldest first


Description: XX Oldest First
Set: Common
Discount: Earned Only
Include items in dispute: Yes
Include late charges: Yes
Remaining Remittance Amount: On Account
Apply Partial Receipts: Yes

3. Select the Add Row icon and enter the following:


Sequence: 1
Rule: Apply to oldest invoice first
Select Save and Close > Done.

208

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Manage Application Rule Sets


1. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select
Task lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define
Receivables Configuration > Define Customer Payments > Manage
Application Rule Sets: Go to Task icon.
Note: This feature is brought forward from Oracle E-Business Suite R12.
When you apply a payment or credit memo to a transaction, the application rule
set determines how Oracle Fusion Receivables reduces the balance due on the
line, tax, freight, and late charges amounts on a transaction.
Receivables uses the application rule set assigned to the transaction type to
process payment applications. If no application rule set is assigned, then
Receivables uses the system options application rule set.
You can arrange the order of the line types and application rules in an application
rule set according to your needs. Each line type must appear in an application
rule set, and appear only once. The Overapplication rule is always last in the
sequence.
Line First - Tax After Rule
The Line First - Tax After rule first applies the payment to the open line amount,
and then applies the remaining amount to the associated tax.
If the payment is greater than the sum of the line and tax, Receivables attempts
to close each open item by applying the remaining amount in the following order,
stopping when the payment has been fully applied:
Freight
Late charges
Any remaining receipt amount is applied using the Overapplication rule.
Line and Tax Prorate
The Line and Tax Prorate rule applies a proportionate amount of the payment to
the open line and tax amount for each line.
If the payment is greater than the sum of the open line and tax amounts,
Receivables attempts to close each open item by applying the remaining amount
in the following order, stopping when the payment has been fully applied:
Freight
Late charges
Any remaining receipt amount is applied using the Overapplication rule.
Prorate All

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

209

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


The Prorate All rule applies a proportionate amount of the payment to each open
amount associated with a debit item (for example, any line, tax, freight, and late
charge amounts for this item).
Receivables uses the following formula to determine the applied amount:
Applied Amount = open application line type amount / sum of application
line types in rule details * Receipt Amount
Any remaining receipt amount is applied using the Overapplication rule.
Overapplication Rule
The Overapplication rule is always the last rule in an application rule set. This
rule applies any remaining receipt amount after the balance due for all charges
has been reduced to zero.
If the transaction type for the debit item allows overapplication, Receivables
applies the remaining amount to the lines, making the balance due negative. If
the transaction type for the debit item does not allow overapplication, you can
either place the remaining amount on-account or leave it unapplied.
Assign the Rounding Correction option to one of the line types in an Application
rule set. When an amount is prorated across more than one line type,
Receivables adjusts the line amount of the line type with the Rounding
Correction option enabled to account for the rounding adjustment.
Note: Lockbox uses the AutoCash rule set to determine how to apply the
remaining amount.

210

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Receivables System Options


Note: Do not save the Receivables System Options, you will cause conflicts with
your fellow classmates.
1. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select Task
lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define Receivables
Configuration > Manage Receivables System Options: Go to Task icon
2. Select US1 Business Unit and select the search button.

3. Select Cash Processing tab, select the list of values for each of the following
attributes to find your new values but do NOT save any of these values in system
options:
AutoMatch
Application Exception Rule Sets
AutoCash Rule Sets

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

211

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Manage Lockbox
In order for the AutoLockbox process to leverage SmartReceipts and AutoApply, you
need to select it. Otherwise, it will apply receipts as it does in R12.

212

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Customer Profile Class


Note: The Customer Profile Class and Customer Setup use the related
SmartReceipts/AutoApply setup.

The customer profile class shares these default settings with other parts of
Oracle Fusion Receivables: Match Receipts By; AutoMatch rule set; AutoCash
rule set; AutoInvoice Grouping rule; payment terms; and tax printing options.
Each of these settings is used according to the hierarchy required by the
transaction or receipt process.
For receipt processing:
Receivables searches for a Match Receipt By value to use for receipt and
transaction comparison in the order: customer site profile, customer
account profile, lockbox (for lockbox processing), and system options.
Receivables searches for an AutoMatch rule set to determine how receipts
are applied automatically and transactions recommended for manual
application in the order: customer site profile, customer account profile,
lockbox (for lockbox processing), and system options.
If Receivables cannot match receipts to transactions, the application
searches for an AutoCash rule set to use to apply receipts in the order:
customer site profile, customer account profile, and system options.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

213

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Applying a Receipt to a Transaction


Background
Implement Oracle Fusion Receivables to manage your accounts receivable processes,
including billing customers, receiving payment from customers, applying payments to
open debit items, and recognizing revenue. This activity provides a context for your
implementation by showing how to apply a receipt to a customer transaction.
Activity Scope
Search for and display an open customer receipt and apply all or part of the receipt
amount to a transaction belonging to the customer.
1. Log in as Your User.
2. Navigate to the Receivables Balances work area.
3. Navigate to Create receipt
4. Enter the following values to create a receipt:
Field

Value

Business Unit

US1 Business Unit

Receipt Method

Check (Directly/No Remit)

Receipt Number

XX123456

Entered amount

150

5. Leave the rest of the fields blank, or accept default value.


6. Add a row in the Remittance Reference Detail region.
7. Select Receipt Match By Transaction number
8. Enter reference number: 1023050
9. Click on the arrow next to Submit and Create Another
10. Select Submit and Autoapply now
11. Review the transaction details in the Application tab of the Receipt Details
section.
12. Select the most applicable recommendation, by selecting the row.
13. Click Accept

214

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


14. By default, the Applied Amount field contains the entire receipt amount. If
necessary, you can update the amount to apply to the transaction.
15. Click the Save button to apply the receipt to the transaction.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

215

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables

Activity Introduction: Defining a Profile Class Demonstration

Background
Demonstrate defining attributes of a profile class and assigning the profile to a customer
account.

Activity Scope
1. Login as your user
2. Setup and Maintenance work area > All Tasks tab > Search field: select Task
lists > Name field: enter Receivables > Search button > Define Receivables
Configuration > Define Customer
3. Expand Define Customer.
4. In the Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes row, click the Go to
Task icon.
5. In the Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes page, click the Create
icon.
6. In the Profile Class Name field, enter XX New (as determined by the instructor).
7. In the Collector field, select Jim Jones.
8. In the Credit Classification field, select New Customer.
9. In the Payment Terms field, select 30 Net.
10. In the Discount Grace Days field, enter 3.
11. Enable the Override terms option.
12. In the Match Receipts By field, select Transaction Number.
13. In the AutoMatch Rule Set field, select Default AutoMatch Rule Set.
14. Enable the Automatically update receipt match by option.
15. In the AutoCash Rule Set field, select Oldest transaction first.
16. In the Application Exception Rule Set field, select Default Exception Rule.
17. Click the Save and Close button.

216

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Oracle Fusion Receivables


18. In the Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes page, click the Done
button.
19. In the Manage Customers row, click the Go to Task icon.
20. In the Manage Customers page, enter in the Account Number field 10040 and
click the Search button.
21. In the Accounts section, click 10040.
22. In the Edit Account page, click the Profile History tab.
23. In the Actions menu, select Correct Record.
24. Select the profile class that you created.
25. Click the Save and Close button.
26. In the Manage Customers page, click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

217

Lesson 15: Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables

Lesson 15: Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables


Lesson 15: Payments for Funds Capture Activities

The following Activity is for Payments for Funds Capture:

218

Creating a funds capture payment method, a funds capture process profile,


modifying an existing internal payee, and creating a routing rule

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 15: Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables

Creating Funds Capture for Receivables

Background
As an implementer, you want to set up funds capture functionality to manage funds
capture transactions and settlement batches.
Activity Scope
You will complete the following tasks:

Create a funds capture payment method for bank account.

Create a funds capture process profile.

Modify an existing internal payee.

Create a routing rule and assign it an internal payee.

___________________________________________________________
Creating a Funds Capture Payment Method:
1.

Login: User your username.

2.

Setup and Maintenance work area > Search: Tasks pane: Define Receivables
> right arrow > Expand Define Receivables Configuration folder > Define
Funds Capture folder > Manage Funds Capture Payment Methods task > Go
to Task icon > Manage Funds Capture Payment Methods page > Create icon
> Create Funds Capture Payment Method dialog box.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

219

Lesson 15: Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables


NOTE: For the exercise below, XX will be assigned by the instructor.
1. In the Name field of the Create Funds Capture Payment Method dialog box,
enter XXPayments Funds Capture Payment Method.
2. In the Code field, enter XXFCPM Code.
3. Click the Save and Close button.
4. Click the OK button.
5. Click the Done button.
Creating a Funds Capture Process Profile:
1. Setup and Maintenance work area > Search: Tasks pane: Define Receivables >
right arrow > Define Receivables Configuration folder > Define Funds Capture
folder > Manage Funds Capture Process Profiles task > Go to Task icon >
Manage Funds Capture Profiles page > from the search results select
Processing Type choice list: Bank account > Create button > Create Funds
Capture Process Profile page.
2. In the Name field on the Create Funds Capture Process Profile page, enter
XXPayments FCPP.
3. In the Code field, enter XXFCPP code.
4. From the Payment System choice list, select the payment system you created
(XXPayments payment system).
6. Select the Formats tab.
7. In the Verification region, select the funds capture format you created from the
Outbound Format choice list.
8. In the Verification region, select PTECH_ONLINE_7_2 from the Inbound
Response Format choice list.
9. In the Settlement region, select the funds capture format you created from the
Outbound Format choice list.
10. In the Settlement region, select PTECH_ONLINE_7_2 from the Inbound
Response Format choice list.
11. Select the Creation Rules tab.
12. In the Settlement Grouping Rules region, select both the Business unit and
the Internal bank account check boxes.
13. In the Settlement Limit region, select USD - Dollar from the Amount choice list.
14. In the field to the right of the Amount choice list, enter 1000.
15. From the Conversion Rate Type choice list, select Corporate.
16. In the Number of Settlements field, enter 6.
220

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 15: Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables


17. Select the Accounts tab.
18. Data defaults into the Payment System Account and the Configuration Profile
fields.
19. In the Verification field, select the transmission configuration you created.
20. In the Settlement field, select the transmission configuration you created.
21. Click the Save and Close button.
22. Click the OK button.
23. Click the Done button.
Modifying an Existing Internal Payee:
1. Setup and Maintenance work area > Search: Tasks pane: Define Receivables >
right arrow > Define Receivables Configuration folder > Define Funds Capture
folder > Manage Internal Payees task > Go to Task icon > Manage Internal
Payees page.
2. On the Manage Internal Payees page, click the Search button. The Vision Online
appears in the Search Results region.
3. Click the Vision Online link.
4. In the Configured Processing Types region on the Edit Internal Payee page,
select both the Electronic funds transfer and Credit card check boxes
5. In the Payment System Accounts region, click the green + (plus) icon.
6. From the Payment System choice list, select the payment system you created
(XXPayments payment system).
7. From the Payment System Account choice list, select the payment system
account you created (Payments payment system account).
8. In the Business Units region, select US1 Business Unit.
9. Click the Save and Close button.
10. Click the OK button.
Creating a Routing Rule:
1. On the Manage Internal Payees page, click the Manage Routing Rules button.
2. In the Routing Rules region on the Manage Routing Rules: Vision Online
page, select Bank Account Transfer from the Payment Method choice list and
click the Create button.
3. In the Name field on the Create Routing Rule page, enter Payments Routing
Rule.
4. In the Conditions region, click the green + (plus) sign.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

221

Lesson 15: Oracle Fusion Payments for Receivables


5. In the Criterion field, select Amount from the choice list.
6. In the Operator field, select Greater than from the choice list.
7. In the Value field, enter 1000.
8. In the Route To region, select the payment system account you created
(Payments payment system account) from the Payment System Account
choice list.
9. In the Route To region, select the funds capture process profile you created
(XXPayments FCPP Payments payment system acount0) from the Funds
Capture Process Profile choice list.
10. Click the Save and Close button. NOTE: At this point, a known issue exists
where you will receive a message that indicates that a connection to the server
has failed.
11. Click the Done button.

222

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


Lesson 16: Advanced Collections Activities

The following are Activities for Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections:

Overview of Advanced Collections: Demonstration.

Create an Aging Method.

Create a Collector.

Dunning Templates: Demonstration.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

223

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections

Advanced Collections Overview: Demonstration

Background
Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections provides a Collections Customer work area
and a Collections Dashboard for collectors to view and work with delinquent customer
transactions. The following instructor led demonstration illustrates the work area and
dashboard that is directly impacted by the setups for Collections.
Activity Scope
Navigate to Collections Customer work area and give the students a guided tour of
the areas covered in setups: Strategy, Scoring, Aging Methods, Collectors, and
Collection Preferences. General areas to cover include the Profile tab covering
Strategies and Collector assigned; the Transaction tab covering Payments, Disputes
and Adjustments; the Aging tab to discuss Aging Methods and view aging buckets; and
the History tab to discuss Correspondence History.
Review the Collections Dashboard illustrating the customers listed are delinquent and
assigned to the collector Jim Jones. A summary of the delinquent customers displays
their total amount due and the breakdown of amounts according to aging. Expand and
review the regions of: Activities, Customer Search, and Process Monitor.
Collections Customer Work Area

1. Enter your User ID: Jim. Jones and Password: Assigned by Instructor. Click
the Sign In button.
2. Click the Navigator link.
3. Click the Customer link under Collections.
4. Under the Search Customers region click the Customer List of Values (LOV).
5. Change the value to Account. Enter the desired information into the Search Text
field. Enter the value 10060. Click the Search button.
6. Review the Customer Information on the lower left region, particularly the
Score and the Status.
7. Review in the Profile tab the Strategy assigned to this customer which consists
of a series of tasks. You can Complete, Edit or Skip the tasks. Complete is only
applicable to an Open task. .

224

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


8. Click the Transaction tab. The customer delinquent invoices are displayed. You
can filter by transaction class, due date, include current, or closed transactions.
You can take the action of paying, disputing, adjusting, or recording promises on
a customer's transaction.
9. Review the Details region. The details of the transaction selected above are
displayed.
10. Click the Activity tab. The Activity tab displays action taken on the specific
transaction, such as partial payment, a submitted dispute, or adjustment. Below
in the Lines region the specific lines of the transaction are displayed.
11. You can take Notes regarding specific transactions. Click the Create button.
Displayed is a free form to insert your notes. Click the Cancel button.
12. Click the Aging tab. The Aging tab displays the customers aging method and
details. You can recalculate by changing the Business Unit and Aging Method.
13. Click the Contact tab. The Contact tab displays the details of the primary and
secondary contacts for the customer.
14. Click the History tab. The Correspondence sub-tab displays the history of
correspondence and the transactions included in that correspondence.
15. Click the Communication tab. The Communications tab displays the phone
numbers, e-mail, and addresses for the customer.
16. Click the Profile tab. The Profile tab displays the customers: Collector,
Business Level view, whether or not to send Dunning Letters and Statements,
contact method, payment terms, statement cycle, and discount grace days. This
profile is directly linked to the customer profile class in Oracle Fusion
Accounts Receivables.
17. Click the Activities tab. The Activities tab displays any actions taken or
scheduled by the collector as follow-up with the customer.
End of Procedure
Collections Dashboard
1. Sign on as Jim.Jones
2. Click the Navigator link.
3. Click the Collections Dashboard link. Displayed are the delinquent customers
that belong to the collector Jim Jones.
4. Expand the Activities region. Use the Activities region to create tasks for
follow-up action with the customer assigned to the collector. Collectors must be
created as Resources in the Customer Relations Management application to
create activities.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

225

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


5. Expand the Customer Search region. Allows you to filter the list of customers
and access the Collections Customer work area.
6. Expand the Process Monitor region. Allows you to view the statuses of
scheduled Collections processes.
7. Click on any of the links displayed in the Search region takes you to the
Collections Customer work area for that specific customer.

End of Procedure

226

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections

Create Collectors
Background
You have been hired as an employee and need to be set up as collector. You also
have been created as user with the roles of Collections Manager and Collections Agent.
Activity Scope
Create yourself as a collector. Once you have created yourself as a new collector you
can assign the collector to customers under the Profile tab on the Customer work area.

Begin at the Setup and Maintenance work area > Click the All Tasks tab > In the
Search region > Enter Manage Collectors in the Name field > Click the Search button
> Click the Go to Task icon.
1. Start from the Manage Collectors page.
2. From the Search Results region, click the green plus sign to create a new
collector.
3. Enter your name as Collector Name. (An alias can be used.)
4. Select from the list of values, Employee the type.
5. Select your name from the list of values in Employee or Group field.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

227

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


6. Check Yes to enable the collector. Note: When you terminate a collector change
the Enable to No, this allows you to enter an Inactive Date.
7. Select Common Set from the list of values as the Collector Set.
8. Click the Save and Close button to complete the creation of a new collector.
End of Procedure

228

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections

Create Aging Methods


Background
Aging is the concept of calculating a customer's past due and current transactions.
Aging shows the amounts owed to the company by its customers and includes the
length of time the amounts have been outstanding. Aging is a view of transaction or
receivables data that helps a collector understand the overdue amounts viewed over
time. This helps the collector prioritize which transactions to focus their collection
efforts.
Activity Scope
You need to create an aging method. Your company requires a unique aging method
that is not a Collections predefined aging method. Use the default values except where
indicated. Create an aging method named XX 1 to 120 Days Method, use the following
tables:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

229

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections

1. Start from the Manage Aging Methods page by searching it on the All Tasks
tab from your implementation project.
2. From the Aging Method region, click the green plus sign to create an aging
method.
3. Enter the name as XX 120 Day Aging. (XX to be assigned by the instructor)
4. Select from the list of values, 7 Bucket Aging as the aging type. Note: You
must use the 7 Bucket Aging when creating methods with 5 or 6 aging
buckets.
5. Enable the aging method by selecting Yes from the list of values.
6. Select Common Set from the list of values as the Aging Method Set.
7. Enter Current to 120 Day Aging Method for the Aging Method Description.
8. Click the Save button.
9. Continue to the Aging Day Method: Details region. Note: Slowly enter the
following information as a lag time exists for each row.
10. Add rows using the green + in the Aging Day Method: Details region
11. Enter Sequence as 0,(Defaults automatically) Bucket Type as Current, Aging
Days From as -9999, Aging Days To as 0, and Aging Bucket Heading as
Current.
12. Enter Sequence as 1, Bucket Type as Past Due, Aging Days From as 1,
Aging Days To as 45, and Aging Bucket Heading as 45 Past Due.
13. Enter Sequence as 2, Bucket Type as Past Due, Aging Days From as 46,
Aging Days To as 60, and Aging Bucket Heading as 60 Past Due.

230

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


14. Enter Sequence as 3, Bucket Type as Past Due, Aging Days From as 61,
Aging Days To as 90, and Aging Bucket Heading as 90 Past Due.
15. Enter Sequence as 4, Bucket Type as Past Due, Aging Days From as 91,
Aging Days To as 120, and Aging Bucket Heading as 120 Past Due.
16. Enter Sequence as 5, Bucket Type as Past Due, Aging Days From as 121,
Aging Days To as 9999, and Aging Bucket Heading as 121+ Past Due.
17. Click the Save and Close button to complete the creation of a new aging
method.
The following validation rules are in place when creating or modifying an aging
method:

A bucket must contain at least 2 bucket lines and at most 7 lines.

A bucket must have Aging Days From less than Aging Days To.

All buckets must cover the range from -9999 to 9999 and there is no way to
update a field with the value of -9999 or 9999. The first bucket must have
Aging Days From = -9999 and the last bucket must have Aging Days To =
9999

Aging buckets cannot have any gaps between -9999 to 9999.

End of Procedure

Editing Scoring Formulas


Background
Scoring formulas are the foundation for your collections activities. Oracle Fusion
Advanced Collections uses scoring in two ways:
1. Determines transaction status as current, delinquent, or pre-delinquent.
Collections scores invoices and debit memos from Oracle Fusion Accounts
Receivables. A customer is delinquent when they have past due transactions.
2. Determines the collectability of each customer at the customer, account, or bill-to
site level. Use data points about the customer to determine collectability.
A Scoring formula provides you an effective way to manage your collections resources
and strategies.
Activity Scope

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

231

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


Collections delivers a set of scoring formulas you can apply or copy and modify to your
specific business needs. You will use the duplicate feature to copy a delivered scoring
formula and make edits to the formula.
Scenario
You have done an analysis and found that customers who are 91+ days overdue are
unlikely to pay. You want to change the weight in your existing formula to give those
customers lower scores.
1. Start from the Manage Collections Scoring page by searching it on the All Tasks
tab from your implementation project.
2. Select the row for Customer Scoring, and click the Duplicate icon.
3. Edit the formula information using the table below:
Field
Name

Value
<Your initial> 91+
Customer Scoring

Comment
Replace Copy of Customer
Scoring. This must be a unique
name.

Optional

Start Date

Determines
Collections Score of
Customers
Current Date

Use todays date

End Date

Leave Blank

Optional

Use an end date if your formula


has limited availability.

This determines the type of


data points you can add to the
formula.

Optional

The lowest possible score the


formula will calculate.

To Score

100

The highest possible score the


formula will calculate.

Enabled

Yes

Activates the formula.

Description

Type

Customer

Description
From Score

232

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections


4. Alter the weights according to the following table:
Data Point
Weight
The Percent of
0.1
Delinquencies 1-30
Days Overdue
The Percent of
Delinquencies 31-60
Days Overdue

0.1

The Percent of
Delinquencies 61-90
Days Overdue

0.1

The Percent of
Delinquencies 91+
Days Overdue

0.7

5.
6.
7.
8.

Comment

Increasing the weight for this


data point will result in a lower
score

Click the Next button.


Click the Next button.
Click the Next button.
Review and test your formula using the information in the table below. Then click
the Score button. The Total Score displays the sum of the weighted scores for
all data points. This is the score assigned to the customer.

Field
Customer Name

Business Unit

Value
Computer Service and
Rental
US1 Business Unit

Comment
Select a customer known to
have 91+ delinquent
transactions.
Select a Business Unit that
contains those transactions.

End of Procedure

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

233

Lesson 16: Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections

Dunning Templates: Demonstration


Background
Oracle Fusion Advanced Collections provides four templates: three dunning notices
(soft, medium, hard ) and one for final demand.
Activity Scope
Navigate to Business Intelligence Publisher (BIP) and give the students a guided tour
of the delivered templates and letters. This is only a demonstration on where these
letters are located. Further information on modifying, editing or create new letters is not
covered as part of the implementation course. More information on BIP can be found in
the Appendix of this course.
1. Start by signing in with the a User ID and Password. User ID: casey.brown.
Password: supplied by trainer. Click the Sign In button.
2. Click the Navigator link.
3. Under Tools > Click the Reports and Analytics link.
4. Shared Folders is where the delivered processes reside for all products. Click
the Expand button.
5. Navigate to the Family Product folder: Financials. Click the Expand button.
6. Navigate to the product folder: Collections. Click the Expand button.
7. Navigate to the Correspondence folder. Click the Expand button.
8. The Collections Send Dunning Letters are the delivered templates. It is
strongly recommended a copy of this be made first before making any edits,
modifications or creation to templates or letters. Click the Collections Send
Dunning Letters link. Click Edit.
9. Either open in MS Word to make edits or save to your local drive and make
changes. Accept the default and click the OK button.
10. Make changes to your letters, save and close.
Note: Only changes to the seeded report will be reflected in the Dunning
Configurations setup.
11. Click the Close button.

End of Procedure

234

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management


Lesson 17: Cash Management Activities

The following are Activities for Oracle Fusion Cash Management:

Overview of Cash Management: Demonstration.

Create a Bank, Branch, and Account.

Create Reconciliation Rules.

Create a Transaction Creation Rule.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

235

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management

Cash Management Overview: Demonstration

Background
Oracle Fusion Cash Management provides a Bank Statements and Reconciliation
work area for you to view Processing Warnings and Errors, view Bank Statement
Reconciliations that are complete and incomplete, and from the Process Monitor,
view and resubmit processes. The following instructor led demonstration illustrates the
work area that is directly impacted by the setups for Cash Management.
Activity Scope
Navigate to Bank Statements and Reconciliation work area and give the students a
guided tour of the areas impacted by setups: Banks, Branches and Accounts,
Bank Statement Processing, and Bank Statement Reconciliation. General areas to
cover include the account security, bank statement codes, and reconciliation rules.

Cash Management Overview Page


1. Enter your User ID and Password: Assigned by Instructor. Click the Sign In
button.
2. Click the Navigator link.
3. Click the Bank Statements and Reconciliation link under Cash Management.
4. Review the following on the tasks list:
5. Bank Statements allows you to process bank statements electronically or enter
them manually.
6. Reconciliation allows you to submit Autoreconciliation or manually perform
reconciliation
7. External Cash Transactions allows you to create and manage transactions
created outside of the applications, such as bank fees and interest.
8. Accounting allows you to create and review the journal entries for General
Ledger.
9. Reporting allows you to submit the delivered Cash Management reports.
10. Review the Cash Management work area regions: Processing Warnings and
Errors, Bank Statement Reconciliation; the Complete and Incomplete tabs,
and the Process Monitor.

236

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management


11. Click the link on the row in the Process Warnings and Errors region. Displayed
is the error or warning associated to import process of the bank statement from
the bank.
12. Review the Bank Statement Reconciliation region. Displayed are 2 tabs:
Incomplete and Complete. Select year to date for the Statement End Date
Range. Select one of the links under both tabs to display the incomplete or
completed bank statement reconciliations.
13. Review the Process Monitor region. This is where submitted process can be
monitored and resubmitted.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

237

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management

Create a Bank, Branch and Account

Background
The first step in configuring Oracle Fusion Cash Management is to define your banks,
branches and accounts. Once you have established your initial banks, branches, and
accounts, you can proceed to configure your processing and reconciliation rules and
apply them to your specific bank accounts.
Activity Scope
In this activity you are to create a bank, branch, and account. Associate the bank to the
legal entity: US 1 Legal Entity. Leave out the processing and reconciliation rules under
the Control tab in the bank account configuration for now. You will return to the account
once you have configured your rules and apply them accordingly.

1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Define receivables configuration in the Name field > Search button > Expand
Define Cash Management and Banking Configuration > Set Up Banks,
Branches, and Accounts > Manage Banks > Go to Task.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Click in the Country list item. Select the United States from the list of values.
4. Enter a name into the Bank Name field. Enter "XX Bank of America". (XX is the
unique identifier assigned to you by the instructor.)
5. Expand Addresses region. Click the Create button. Enter the address
information as follows: 1234 Main St, Dallas, TX 75233. Click the OK button.
6. Expand the Contacts region. Click the Create icon. Enter a First Name and
Last Name of the contact. Click in the OK button.
7. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button.
8. Click the Create Branch button.
9. Enter the information into the Branch Name field. Enter Downtown Branch.
10. Expand Addresses region. Click the Create icon and enter the address
information: 1234 Main St. Dallas Texas 75233.
11. Click the OK button. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button.
12. Click the View Branches button. Click the Create Account button.
13. Enter an Account Name, Number, and Currency.

238

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management


14. Click in the Legal Entity Name field. Select US1 Legal Entity from the list of
values. Note: The general ledger accounts under the General tab do not appear
until the Legal Entity Name has been specified.
15. Click into the Cash field and click on the Search icon. Enter 11200 in the
Account segment. Click the OK button.
16. Click in the Cash Clearing field. Click on the Search icon. Enter 11501 in the
Account segment.
17. Click in the Reconciliation Differences field and click on the Search icon. Enter
11101 in the Account segment. Click the OK button.
18. Click the Controls tab. Note: The Cash Management Controls contains the
Reconciliation rules to be applied to this specific bank account. The Bank
Statement Processing region is where you specify the Parsing Rule set for this
bank account. The Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules region allows
you to sequence and specify the rule for the external transactions to be created.
You will enter these fields after you have created processing and reconciliation
rules.
19. Click the Security tab.
20. Check the Secure Bank Account by User and Roles checkbox. Note: By
securing the bank account by user and roles, you are able to assign either a
specific role or user to have access to this bank account. You can assign one or
the other or a combination of both.
21. Select and Add a user.
22. Assign your User Name in the Name field. Click the OK button.
23. Click the Business Unit Access tab.
24. Click the Create icon. Secure the bank account by selecting your Business Unit
(or US1 if you did not create one from the earlier Activity) from the list of values.
Click the OK button.
25. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button.
26. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

239

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management

Create a Transaction Creation Rule

Background
The first step in configuring Banks Statement Transaction Creation Rule, is to define
your bank transaction codes. These codes are usually provided by your bank to identify
activity on your bank statement.
Activity Scope
In this activity you are to create a bank transaction code, then use that code to define
your Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rule.

1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Define Receivables Configuration in the Name field >Expand Define Cash
Management and Banking Configuration > Define Bank Statement
Processing and Reconciliation > Manage Bank Statement Transaction
Codes > Go to Task.
2. Click the Create button.
3. Enter the following required fields: Transaction Code: 0XX; Description: Bank
Adjustment due to rates; Transaction Type: Bank Adjustment.
4. Click the Save and Close button.
5. Click the Done button.
6. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Define Receivables Configuration in the Name field >Expand Define Cash
Management and Banking Configuration > Define Bank Statement
Processing and Reconciliation > Manage Bank Statement Transaction
Creation Rules. Click the Go to Task button.
7. Click the Create button.
8. Enter the required information into the Name field. Enter 0XX Bank Adjustment
Select US1 Legal Entity from the list of values as the Legal Entity.
9. Navigate to the Statement Line Identification Criteria region. Select Bank
Adjustment from the list of values in the Type field. Enter the code you just
created; 0XX in the Transaction Code field.
10. Navigate to the Transaction Details region. Enter Bank Adjustment in the
Type field. Select the business unit from you created from the list of values (or
select US1 Business Unit if you did not create your own business unit).

240

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management


11. Enter the accounting for the Cash Account. Enter 11200 for the Cash Account
segment. Click the OK button.
12. Enter the accounting for the Offset Account. Enter 11101 for the Offset Account
segment. Click the OK button.
13. Click the Save and Close button.
14. Click the OK button.
15. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

241

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management

Create Reconciliation Rules


Background
You have established your bank, branch, and account. Proceed to configure your
reconciliation rules and apply them to your specific bank account.
Activity Scope
In this activity you are to create a tolerance rule, a matching rule and a rule set.
Associate the rules you have created to the bank account and assign them accordingly.
Tolerance Rules
1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Search > Define Receivables Configuration in the Name field > Expand
Define Cash Management and Banking Configuration > Define Bank
Statement Processing and Reconciliation > Manage Bank Statement
Reconciliation Tolerance Rules > Go to Task.
2. Click the Create icon.
3. Enter the required information into the Name field: XX Date and Amount. Enter:
Date and Amount Tolerance for Payables in the Description field.
4. Enable the Date Tolerance region. Enter 3 for Day Before and 3 for Days After.
5. Enable the Amount Tolerance region. Enter 2 for Amount Below and 2 for
Amount Above.
6. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button. Click the Done button.
Matching Rules
1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Search > Define Receivables Configuration in the Name field > Expand
Define Cash Management and Banking Configuration > Define Bank
Statement Processing and Reconciliation > Manage Bank Statement
Reconciliation Matching Rules row. Click the Go to Task icon.
2. Click the Create button.
3. Name the rule XX Matching for Payables. Enter a description of One to One
Matching for Payables. Check Payables as the Transaction Sources.
4. Select One to One as the Matching Type.
5. Check Amount and Date for this rule.

242

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 17: Oracle Fusion Cash Management


6. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button. Click the Done button.
Rule Sets
1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Search > Define Receivables Configuration in the Name field > Expand
Define Cash Management and Banking Configuration > Define Bank
Statement Processing and Reconciliation > Manage Bank Statement
Reconciliation Rule Sets row. Click the Go to Task icon.
2. Click the Create button.
3. Enter the rule set Name as XX RS. Enter into the Description field: Rules Set
XX.
4. Navigate to the Reconciliation Rules region.
5. Click the Create button.
6. Note: The Sequence 1 defaults when you first create the rule set. Enter XX
Matching for Payable in the Matching Rule field. The One to One defaults as
the Matching Type. Enter XX Date and Amount in the Tolerance Rule field.
7. Click the OK button.
8. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button. Click the Done button.
Assign to Bank Account
1. Navigate to Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks > Search region > enter
Search > Define Receivables Configuration in the Name field > Expand
Define Cash Management and Banking Configuration > Setup Bank,
Branches, and Accounts > Manage Bank Accounts row. Click the Go to Task
icon.
2. Select the bank account you created earlier and click the link.
3. Navigate to the Control tab.
4. Assign the rules you just created to your bank account. You must be in edit mode
to apply the rules to the account. Click the Edit button.
5. Navigate to the Reconciliation region. Assign XX Date and Amount in the
Manual Reconciliation Tolerance Rule field and in the Automatic
Reconciliation Rule Set field assign XX RS.
6. Navigate to the Bank Statement Transaction Creation Rules. Add a new rule
by clicking the green plus and select your rule as sequence 1.
7. Click the Save and Close button. Click the OK button. Click the Done button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

243

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


Viewing Account Groups in Mobile Financial Reporting Center using
Sunburst
Background
For this exercise, we need to use a different user (Anita.Kennedy) and pre-defined
ledgers. The reason for this is there is pre-seeded data under this user and these
ledgers that would be too time-consuming to add to your own user and ledger.
Activity Scope
View Account Group in Mobile Financial Reporting Center and also using Sunburst.
These are new features in R9.
Anita Kennedy is responsible for tracking and analyzing the global revenues for Lob-9
and a specific set of servers. She has created two Account Groups: Monthly Rev. and
Sales Org. to analyze revenue on a monthly basis comparing the current periods
revenue with the same period last year. The Account Group consists of a mixture of
parent company values which represent different regions; parent product values that
represent server series; and a subset of cost center child values.
Since she has a global responsibility she is interested in viewing the overall
performance of the sales organizations broken down by region and product to
understand overall performance; identify trends and anomalies that may call for further
analysis.
She can review the revenue in a tabular form (i.e. as presented) or using an interactive
visualization called a sunburst.

1. Sign in as Anita.Kennedy with weekly password to be provided by instructor.


2. Click the Financial Reporting Center link under General Accounting.
3. Make sure Data Access Set = US Primary Ledger. If not, please change it.
4. Sign out.
5. Re sign in using Financial Reporting menus (using Anita.Kennedy). This will
take you to the Mobile Financial Reporting Center
6. Select the Reports icon.
7. Select Account Groups in the Show list of values.
8. User Anita Kennedy has 2 Account Groups that analyze the revenue for LOB-9
9. Select Sales Org.
10. The account group is displayed. Highlight the following:

244

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


o Account groups are a user defined set of parent or child level accounts
that the user wishes to track analyze on a regular basis.
o Users can define account groups to monitor period, quarterly, or yearly
balances, compared to the same timeframe last year or compared to the
immediate prior period, quarter or year. [Review the different types of
account groups pre-defined.]
o Actual data can be monitored against budget data.
o Users can define thresholds for account balance variances to trigger
accounts to be displayed on the Account Monitor.
o Users can monitor detail accounts or combinations with parent level
segment values
11. From the Account Monitor ui, the user can change the account group, period or
dimensions displayed.
12. Change the period to 09-14. The balances will be automatically updated.

13. The user can also control which segments and descriptions are displayed.
Press the Show/Hide Segments button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

245

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


14. Feel free to add columns to the Account Monitor but dont remove Company,
Cost Center or Product. Changes are preserved so that the user will see the
same columns (and column order) next time they log in.
15. Check that the first column is Product (Value or Description). If not you can drag
Product to the far left.
16. Press View as Sunburst. The Account Group balances are re-displayed as a
sunburst visualization.

17. Press Show Description.

246

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Highlight the following:


o The sunburst consists of the sunburst itself (the colored concentric circles)
and interactive controls / legend in the panel on right and top left of the
sunburst.
o The center of the sunburst represents the total of the Sales Org. balances.
Move the mouse to the center of the sunburst where the total balances for
the selected period and, in this case, the same period from the previous
year are displayed.
o Each sunburst ring represents a different segment of the accounting
flexfield. The inner ring represents product, the middle ring cost center and
the outer ring company. The order of the rings is displayed on the control
panel on the right. The controls can also be used to change which
segments are displayed in the sunburst (and their order see below).
o Each node (slice, wedge, etc.), represents a breakdown of the balances
by the parent or child segment values included in the account group. The
size (width) of the node represents the relative contribution of each
segment value balance to the total. In the inner ring (product) Elite Pro
Series contributes more than 50% of the revenue, Sentinel Servers
approximately, 30% of the revenue and Accessories the rest. Hence, the
sunburst naturally emphasizes the most important contributors because
they occupy more space.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

247

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


o The middle and outer rings further breakdown the Sales Org balances.
The Key Accounts cost center contributes the lions share of revenue to
the Elite Pro Series. The outer ring further breaks down the contribution by
region. In effect, the sunburst represents the Sales Org. revenue broken
down by a series of subtotals.
o The color of the nodes represents a comparison with the previous period
(or budget etc.). By default, green implies increased revenue grown (or
decreased costs), red implies decreased revenue (or increased costs) and
yellow represents little or no change either way. The colors and color
thresholds can be changed using controls in the right hand panel.
Warning: on a mobile device the color thresholds are quite difficult to
change because the slider controls are so small.
o Finally, contributions that are small relative to the total revenue (and which
would therefore result in very narrow nodes) are grouped into Other
nodes. The other threshold (by default, 2% of the circumference of the
sunburst) can be changed using controls in the right hand panel. Warning:
on a mobile device the other threshold is quite difficult to change because
the slider control is so small.

Anita Kennedy can draw the following conclusions from the sunburst:
o Overall, revenue has grown for products in the account group (total
revenue has grown 6.5% year on year and the center node is colored
green).
o All products have performed reasonably well in September 2014 (all three
product lines are green meaning that revenue increased).
o However; it seems that there are some issues with cost centers and
perhaps regions

18. Anita uses the interactive features on the sunburst to explore Septembers
results in more detail. Rather than breaking down the results by product, she
would like to see them displayed by Cost Center. Select any segment in the
middle ring (cost center) and press the Move Ring Toward Center button.

248

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

The sunburst is re-drawn with the cost center in the inner ring. (Note: The user can
also move rings using the Move Ring Away from Center button)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

249

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Anita Kennedy can draw the following conclusions from the sunburst:
o Key Accounts accounts for over 75% of the revenue worldwide and has
grown reasonable well however; Regional Sales and Indirect Sales had
weak growth and Inside Sales (the smallest contributor) actually
decreased.
o Focusing on Regional Sales, we can see that were patchy contributions
from different product lines and regions (some had positive contributions
and some did not). Regional Sales doesnt seem to be a determining
factor in the overall performance because there are many variations below
it.
19. She decides to take a regional perspective. Select the Company segment in
the right hand control panel and then press the blue up arrow twice

250

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

The sunburst is re-drawn with the Company in the inner ring.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

251

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Anita Kennedy can draw the following conclusions from the sunburst:
o North America, APAC and EMEA all made similar contributions and had
positive growth.
o Indirect Sales and Inside Sales are only tracked separately in North
America where their performance was poor.
o In LAD (the smallest contributor) revenue actually decreased year on year.
The fact that all LAD revenue is small or negative irrespective of the cost
center or product line implies that LAD is a determining factor. It probably
warrants further analysis.
o APAC grew in all product lines and cost centers.
o EMEA seems to have an issue with Regional Sales.

20. Anita decides to take a closer look at EMEAs results. Select the EMEA node in
the sunburst and then press the Keep Only button above the sunburst.

252

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

The sunburst is re-drawn with only EMEA in the inner ring.


(Note: You can also filter using Remove Only which removes the selected nodes
and its children in outer rings from the sunburst).

21. Select the EMEA node in the sunburst and then press Zoom in icon at top.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

253

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

The sunburst is re-drawn with the countries below EMEA in the company hierarchy
displayed.

254

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Anita Kennedy can draw the following conclusions from the sunburst:
o Although EMEA had overall good performance, performance at the
country level was uneven.
o Germany, United Kingdom and Turkey had good growth however; other
countries had weak growth and Russia and some of the smaller countries
actually decreased revenue.
o The correlation of the country performance with the corresponding cost
center and product line performance implies that country is an important
factor in influencing results.

22. Known Issues:


o Changing the period in the sunburst control panel sometimes causes
buttons to be grayed out.
o Zoom Out (drill back up) on a hierarchy sometimes results in an error. You
can use the Reset button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

255

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


o In the Monthly Rev. sunburst, Zoom In (drill down) on the Cost Center ring
always provokes an error. You can clear / correct using the Reset button.
23. Other things to try:
o Product segment values are also parents: Zoom In to see varied
performance by server model / different types of accessory.
o Asia is growing: Zoom In to see China growing across all products and
cost centers; the only country not doing so well in APAC is Korea.
o Change the period to see the evolution of the results. 04-14 was not a
good month compared to the previous year.
o Use the segment control in the right hand panel to blank out a segment
and therefore have a sunburst with two rings.
24. Click Done when you are finished.

256

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Configure an Account Group Activity


Background
Your company, Vision America Inc, uses the Account Monitor to define groups of key
accounts that are organized by purpose, category, and comparison criteria.
Activity Scope
Configure two account groups, one to display balances from your external application
and the other one to view your actual versus budget balances.
Note: Select all values from the list of values to avoid errors, do not type them in
directly.
1. Sign in using your own login.
2. Click the Navigator menu.
3. Click the Financial Reporting Center link under General Accounting.
4. Use the Account Monitor region to add and review designated accounts.
5. Click the View menu.
6. Click the Account Group menu.
7. Click Create.
8. Type in the Name field: XX External Balances.
9. Enter the Description field: For tracking balances from the external application.
10. The first created Account Group is created as default and can therefore not be
changed.
11. Accept the Time Option: Accounting Period.
12. Click the Comparison Option list and select Prior period PTD list item.
13. Click the Add Row button.
14. Select Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
15. Select Company (CO): 941.
16. Click the Line of Business (LoB): 10.
17. Search and select the Account (ACC): 46000 (first one on the list).
18. Enter Cost Center (CC): 121. (first one on the list)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

257

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


19. Enter Product (Prod):111. (first one on the list)
20. Enter Intercompany (IC): 000. (first one on the list)
21. Click Always Display.
22. Click the Save and Create Another.
23. Click in the Name field. XX Actuals Versus Budget.
24. Enter the Description: For tracking Actuals versus budget balances.
25. Do not click the Set as default option.
26. Accept the Time Option: Accounting Period.
27. Click the Comparison Option list and select Budget PTD list item.
28. Scenario: Budget.
29. Click the Add Row button.
30. Select the Ledger: US Primary Ledger.
31. Select Company (CO): 101.
32. Click the Line of Business (LoB): field: 10.
33. Click the Account (ACC) : 60500.
34. Enter Cost Center (CC): 400 (first one on list).
35. Enter Product (Prod): 000.
36. Enter Intercompany (IC): 000.
37. Click Always Display.
38. Click the Save and Close.
39. You have successfully configured an account group.
40. To view your accounts, click on the View menu.
41. Select Account Group you wish to view.
42. To change the period, select the Accounting Period on the right hand side.
(Select 02-12 period for the External Balances account group and Actuals vs.
Budget Balances account group to view data.)

258

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

SmartView
The multi-dimensional account balance capabilities provided by Fusion General Ledger
provide unprecedented advances in account analysis. With SmartView, users can slice
and dice account balance information by any segment or hierarchy within the chart of
accounts. This Excel plug-in allows users to inquire on real-time account balances in a
spreadsheet and also provides drilldown to the application for additional details.
Highlighted Features:
Online analysis of account balances in a familiar spreadsheet environment.
o You get better user-friendliness and greater productivity in manipulating
and analyzing financial data in any ad hoc way that suits you.
Drill down from parent-level account balances to lower level account balances
and to the underlying journals.
o You get instant access to the details you need to investigate and resolve
any issues.
Refresh the spreadsheet to update the latest balance information, for example if
a new journal gets posted.
o You get up-to-date data instantly, so your decisions are always based on
current, correct information.
Steps
This introductory flow shows you how straightforward it is to inquire upon and
manipulate account balances using familiar desktop tools, in order to get to the
information you want in an efficient, user-friendly way.
1. Launch Microsoft Excel and open the R9_SmartView.xls file. Note that your
Smart View queries can be saved and reused, saving time if you are regularly
investigating similar account balance information.
2. Click on the Refresh button in the Point of View window or in the Essbase
toolbar. This will prompt you to log in. Use your Fusion Applications username
and password.
3. After entering your username and password, click on the Sign In button with
your mouse. Do not just hit the Enter key on your keyboard.
Smart View is connected to your Fusion training environment. You can see this
configuration by navigating in Excel to Smart View > Options > Advanced >
Shared Connections URL and reviewing the url: https://rws2-fapXXXXfin.oracledemos.com/workspace/SmartViewProviders.
4. Using the Point of View (POV) window

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

259

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


This Point of View window allows you to select values for your data dimensions 1,
so you can pinpoint the information you want in your Excel analysis. This window
can be floating or docked at the top / side of the screen to suit you. Try it by
grabbing the title bar and dragging to move or dock the window.

The Smart View Shared Connections window may also appear, but as your
database connection is already setup for this exercise, you can close this
window.

a. Find the Cost Center dimension in the Point of View (POV) window (hint: All
Corporate Cost Centers-V5), and click the list of values arrow to select a
new value.
Note: If you hover over the pull-down arrows beside each dimension, you will
see the dimension names.
From the list, click [] to open the Member Selection window. The
Members region shows all hierarchies (trees) and tree versions that have
been created for this dimension.
1

In Smart View terminology, dimensions are each of the segments of your chart accounts plus other
accounting elements such as ledger, currency, accounting period, balance type. The values for each
dimension are known as members.

260

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

b. Click [+] to expand the parent value All Cost Center Values. This displays a
list of all cost center values in your chart of accounts.
c. Next, click [+] to expand the hierarchy All Corporate Cost Centers-V5. This
displays the hierarchy with the parent values and the child values that roll up
to them.
Note: When a value appears in more than one tree version of the same
dimension, Smart View always uses the unique member path to identify each
value. For example, if parent cost center value 100 appears in more than one
hierarchy, the name of the hierarchy precedes value 100 to identify which
hierarchy it came from. This is important because parent cost center value
100 may have different child cost center values rolling up to it in different
hierarchies. The value prefixed by the hierarchy name is referred to as the
fully qualified member name. The fully qualified member name is also used
when the same value is used in more than one dimension, for example if
99000 is a valid value for both company and account, it will be shown as fullyqualified member name [Company]@[99000] and [Account]@[99000] to
distinguish the two.
d. Select cost center 400 by checking the box next to the cost center value and
click the

icon to move it across to the Selection region, and also click the

icon to take the existing value out of the Selection region, and then click
OK to close the window.

e. Click the Refresh button. The Smart View query will refresh the account
balances for the cost center that you selected. If you selected a parent value,
the amounts retrieved are the sum of accounts balances for its children.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

261

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


f. Investigate some of the other dimensions available in the POV window.
Remember to click Refresh after changing any member values in order for
the changes to be reflected in the balances.

Balance Amount
The Balance Amount lets you select whether you want to see the
Beginning Balance, Period Activity, or Ending Balance for account
balances. Selecting Period Activity displays the account balance
activity that occurred during the month. Selecting Ending Balance
displays the year-to-date balance for Revenue and Expense accounts,
or inception-to-date balance for Asset, Liability, and Equity accounts.

Other Chart of Account Dimensions: Company, Line of Business,


Product

Scenario
The scenario is currently set to Actuals. Selecting Budget for the
scenario would return budget data.

Amount Type
The Amount Type is set to Base. Other options are Period-to-Date,
Quarter-to-Date, Year-to-Date. Base is like the universal amount type
and enables you to view any amount type/balance amount
combination. If you select Period-to-Date, Quarter-to-Date, or Yearto-Date, you would need to select the appropriate Balance Amount to
go with it before you can view the data.

Currency
The currency is currently set to USD. You can select other currencies
in your query, such as CNY (Chinese Yuan), but you will also need to
change the Currency Type to Entered in order to view data.

Currency Type
The currency is currently set to Total. The Vision US PL ledger
accounts for all transactions in USD accounting currency. The ledger
has some foreign currency transactions denominated in CNY, so
selecting CNY currency and currency type Entered will display some
account balances in CNY. Also, selecting the currency type
Converted from [] will display that foreign currency amount
converted to USD.

262

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


Guidelines:
If Currency Type = Total, then pick the ledger currency in the Currency
dimension
If Currency Type = Entered, then pick an entered currency (or foreign
currency) in the Currency dimension
If Currency Type = Converted from [], then pick the ledger currency
In order to see total balances (both foreign amounts converted to USD,
and those originally entered in USD), use the Currency Type Total and
Currency of USD.
Note: Some of the dimensions do not have a specific member value specified by
default. In those cases, they will take the value of the top of the hierarchy as the
default. For instance, the default for product will be All Product Values which is
the top of the hierarchy, and the default for Amount Type is Base, which is the
first value.
As demonstrated here, the Point of View window acts like a set of parameters to
refine the data in your spreadsheet. When you change values in the point of
view, they can be refreshed instantly against the latest General Ledger data; you
do not need to run any batch process to load in new data.
5. Working within the spreadsheet
The POV is a convenient way of changing your view of the data, but you can also
place multiple dimensions within your Excel sheet in order to see multiple
member values at once in a report-style layout. Dimensions can be dragged-anddropped from the POV window onto the spreadsheet, and you can have multiple
dimensions in the rows or the columns.
The example spreadsheet shows the Account dimension in the rows, and the
Accounting Period dimension in the columns.
a. Revert the changes you made in the previous step, or simply close the
spreadsheet without saving it, and then re-open it and log in again.
b. Drag the cost center dimension from the POV window over to the left-hand
side of your spreadsheet (over the top of one of the Account cells in Column
A). When you drop it into place, it will become a new row dimension.
Note: If your dimension lands in the wrong place, right-click-and-drag to move
it back to where you started and try again it becomes easier with practice.
You also have an Undo button in the Smart View menu (when working in
Smart View, use this instead of the standard Undo function in Excel).

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

263

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

c. Parent values can be expanded within the spreadsheet to drill down and view
the account balances of the child values, or parent values can be collapsed.
Either use Zoom-In from the Essbase menu or double-click on the Qtr1-12
value to expand the quarter into months. Click on 01-12 and select Zoom
Out from the Essbase menu toolbar. See how it collapsed the months 01-12,
02-12, and 03-12 into Qtr1-12.
d. Next, click on one of the accounts in column B (i.e. 40000 Revenues) and
double-click on it or select Zoom In. This expands the parent value to its
child accounts. If some of the descendent values of 40000 were also parent
values, you could expand them to see their children. Each child level in the
hierarchy is indented from its parent.
e. Select any of the child values and select Zoom Out to see the child values
collapse back into the parent value.
Note: Child values are expanded above their parent rather than below.
f. From the Smart View toolbar, click Options and select the Member Options
tab. Under the Zoom In grouping, you can specify how members of a
hierarchy are displayed; for example, you can control whether you zoom in by
one level at a time, expand all child levels, or zoom straight o the lowest level
of the hierarchy.
g. Under the Data Options tab, you can control the suppression of data under
the Suppress Rows grouping. Check the box to suppress the No Data /
Missing, click OK to close the Options window, and refresh your spreadsheet.
The accounts with no balances (corresponding cells have #Missing) will be
removed from your analysis. (If this box was already checked, see what
happens when you uncheck it).

264

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


h. Try using the Essbase toolbar to keep only data for the first two quarters and
remove the rest of the quarters from the spreadsheet. Use CTRL + Click to
select the cells containing the labels Qtr1-12 and Qtr2-12. Click
in
the Essbase toolbar and this will be the only accounting periods retained in
the spreadsheet. The
function works in a similar way.
i.

If you know the unique member name of a dimension member, you can type it
into the desired position, and Smart View will look up the data. Type Qtr3-12
into the cell to the right of Qtr2-12. Hit the Enter key on your keyboard.
Click Refresh. The Qtr3-12 column should populate with data.

j.

You can also pivot the data in the spreadsheet if you want to change the
orientation of your view. In the POV, go to the Balance Amount dimension (it
might currently be displaying Period Activity and select the parent value
Balance Amounts and remove Period Activity . Click Refresh.

k. Next, drag the Balance Amount dimension from the POV and drop it over
Qtr1-12 to place this dimension in the column.
l.

Double-click on the Balance Amount value to expand to its children


Beginning Balance, Period Activity, and Ending Balance.

m. To pivot the data in the spreadsheet, click to select the cell that reads
Balance Amount, and use the Essbase toolbar to pivot the Balance Amount
dimension from the columns to the rows using the
button. The
spreadsheet is now laid out with 3 dimensions Balance Amount, Cost
Center, and Account in the rows of the report.
The selected dimension to be pivoted is always moved to the outermost
row/column of the opposite axis. This might not always be the most helpful
place for your analysis, so the dimensions can also be rearranged in the
spreadsheet by dragging and dropping.
To analyze the data by cost center first then balance amounts within each
account, right-click and drag the cell for Balance Amount from the left of the
spreadsheet and position it over column C where the account values begin
and the spreadsheets layout will change accordingly.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

265

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

n. Dimensions can also be dragged back to the POV window if you would like to
remove them from the spreadsheet. Right-click and drag the cell with the first
cost center listed and drop it back to the POV window. The cost center
dimension is removed from the spreadsheet.
o. You can use Excels capabilities for calculations on the data in your
spreadsheet to calculate totals, averages, variances, etc. The recommended
practice is to add calculations after you have finalized your report layout,
since adding a new dimension to your Smart View report might mess up your
calculations or cause data in them to be lost. You can also use Excel
formatting and conditional formatting to change fonts, or the way cells display
currencies, percentages, etc.
6. Refreshing the query to see real-time balance information
Having the flexibility to manipulate your balances in Excel without the need to
import and export the data is a key feature of General Ledger and Smart View
integration.
One additional problem with traditional import/export to Excel is that data can
become stale your analysis would be based on out-of-date information as
new journals are posted and balances change. Smart View has a Refresh button
on the POV window and on the Essbase toolbar which will instantly update your
data with the most current balances posted in General Ledger, so you can reuse

266

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


your query time and again, knowing that it is always based on accurate account
balances.
7. Drilldown to GL journals
You can drill down on an account balance in Smart View directly into Fusion
General Ledger to view the journal lines that make up the account balance. Be
sure you are logged into the Fusion environment in your default browser. Select
the Drill Through icon on the Essbase toolbar to drill into the GL Inquiry page.
(If drilldown does not work, go to Essbase menu in the spreadsheet, select
Change Alias, and make sure it is set to NONE.)
8. Creating new Smart View query
a. To create a new query, open a blank spreadsheet, and click on the Panel
icon in the Smart View menu.
b. Select Shared Connections to open the Shared Connections window.
c. In the dropdown list, select Oracle Essbase. Expand on
Essbase_FA_Cluster, USChartofAccounts, and db.
d. Double click on db and more options appear at the bottom of the window.
e. Select Ad Hoc Analysis.
f. Dimensions appear on the spreadsheet, and click on POV to get the POV
window. You can begin selecting the values for your query.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

267

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Financial Reporting Center


The Financial Reporting Center within Fusion General Ledger provides immediate
access to financial reports without requiring batch jobs. The flexibility in defining these
reports include drag-and-drop capabilities, snapshot reporting, standard output types
such as PDF, HTML, and spreadsheets and drill-down access.
Highlighted Features
Immediate, integrated access to financial and management reports without the
need for concurrent programs or batch jobs.
Runtime prompts and expansions for instant access to current, relevant data at
any level in your accounting hierarchy.
Group and distribute reports to end users in Books, such as multiple reports for
the same cost center, or the same report run for multiple cost centers.
Drag and drop object-based report creation with advanced formatting and
formulas for high-quality multi-dimensional reporting.
Wide variety of report output formats: HTML, PDF, Excel-Query Ready (i.e.
Smart View ready), Excel formatted.
Drill to underlying transactions in General Ledger.

Financial Reporting Access Live Reports


The following exercise guides you through the process for using Fusion Financial
Reporting to deliver financial and management reports to GL users. This introductory
flow will show you some existing financial reports and books that have been defined,
and highlight the features that differentiate Fusion Financial Reporting, such as

Immediate, integrated access to financial and management reports without the


need for concurrent programs or batch jobs

Runtime prompts and expansions for instant access to current, relevant data at
any level in your accounting hierarchy.
1. Log into your Fusion environment as casey.brown.
2. Navigate to Navigator>General Accounting>Financial Reporting Center.
3. In the Financial Reports region, select each link as follows: Shared
FoldersFinancialsFinancial ReportUS Reports

268

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

This page presents the user with a list of all the Reports and Books that are
available to them.
The first tab shows the Live online reports these are interactive reports with a
Point of View that are run against real time data.
The second tab shows snapshot reports which have been published (from a
previously scheduled Financial Report Batch) for a particular point in time and
cannot be changed.
Reports and Books can be published directly in four different ways

HTML

PDF (not configured in Oracle environment)

Fully formatted in Excel

Query ready in Excel

4. Click on the Income Statement (Period Comparison) report, selecting the


link or the icon for View in HTML
5. When the report displays, you will be presented with a Prompt window where
you choose the Company segment value for running the report.
6. Click on the Member Selection icon. (If you do not get the prompt window,
please check if pop up blocker is enabled for your browser from Tools->
Options -> Content. You need to allow pop ups for the URL of the Oracle
environment.)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

269

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

7. Click to expand
Company >
[Company].[All Corporate Company-v1] >
[Company].[@T] >
[Company].[@100] >
and then use the checkboxes to select the values 101 and 102 if they arent
already selected.
8. Click the Add to Selected icon to move the two new values over to the right
hand side of the window.
You will see that members are identified by their unique member name, for
example [All Company Values].[101] rather than just 101. This allows the
Financial Reporting application to uniquely identify each member if they
appear in more than one version of a hierarchy (e.g. tree-v1 and tree-v2), or if
the same value is used in multiple dimensions (e.g. if 100 is used as a cost
center value and also a product value).
9. Click OK to close this window. Your prompt for Company will have changed to
Company, 101-US 1 LE 1 BU 1, 102-US 1 LE 2 BU 2.
10. Click OK to run the report.
The report is displayed in your browser window. Remember you can collapse
the Task Area pane to the left of the screen if you require more space on
screen for your working pane. If you do not see any data in the report, please
check that the data access set is set to US Primary Ledger (upper left corner
of screen), and set the Accounting Period to 12-13 (its in Qtr4-13).

270

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


Across the top of the report pane, you will see a grey band. This is the User
Point of View (POV) for your report (which tracks last used values per user for
each dimension).

If you need to change a value for the User POV, select the tab for that
dimension (i.e. AccountingPeriod, Cost Center, etc). The member selector
will pop up. Proceed to navigate the tree to find the appropriate value.
A user viewing the report can change the member value for any of the
dimensions on the User POV, so they can customize the report data to fit
their needs.
The User POV dimensions are links, and if you click on them you will pop
open the Member Selection window so you can refine the data that appears
on the report. Then, this User POV is tracked for each user and every
dimension, and always shows the last selected value the next time you run
any report (not just this current report) where that dimension is contained in
the User POV. This provides efficiencies because for some users they will
always run reports for a particular Company parent or Cost Center parent.
At the top of the report is the Grid Point of View (POV). This works like the
User POV, except that the Grid Point of View locks the initial value for that
report every time you run the report (based on report definition). Grid Point of

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

271

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


View allows you to update the value for the current report similar to User
POV, but it will not update the last member selected in the User POV settings.
Note: In Financial Reporting terminology, dimensions are each of the
segments of your chart of accounts plus other accounting elements such
as ledger, currency, accounting period, balance type. Members are the
values within each dimension.
NOTE: A dimension can only exist in one place on a report either row,
column, page, User POV or Grid POV. Therefore, for a particular report,
the User POV represents every dimension that is not in the row, column
and page (and Grid POV).
11. Click on the User POV for Accounting Period. Currently the Accounting
Period for the report is 12-13.
12. The member selection window will pop up, use it to change the User POV to
02-14 (it is in Qtr1-14) and click OK.

The report will be redisplayed on your screen using the new point of view.
You will see that the report displays data both for 02-14 and also for 01-14.
When you change the User POV, all report values that are based on that
User POV will change accordingly.
Please be aware that when you pop open the Member Selection
window for the Point of View, you should click either OK or Cancel to close
it (do not select the button for the window).

272

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


For this report, the Company dimension is defined at the Page level.
Therefore, you can move to each page by using the pull down menu at the
top of the report layout to see a new page for a new company segment.
13. Use the pull down menu to view the Income Statement report for two
companies: 101 and 102 (which were selected in the prompt). [Note that if
you select company 102, there is no data loaded for this company in this
demo environment.]

Note the small grey arrows beside your account segment values, indicating
that these are parent values that can be expanded. Parent or child account
balance totals can be shown instantly at any level of the hierarchy.
14. Click on the arrow beside Revenues. You will see this accounts direct
children appear below it. Each of these values also has an arrow beside
them, meaning that they are also a parent account.
15. Click on 40000 Revenues. You will see that this account has some children
that are child values and do not have an arrow beside them. They are at the
lowest level of the hierarchy and cannot be expanded further.
16. Click on 50000 Material and Goods. This account has some children that
are parent values and can be expanded further. Account balance totals are
calculated at every level of your hierarchy, so you can expand and contract

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

273

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


these values and see the balances at any chosen level within your account
structure.
Expansions are within the financial report itself. This is different than Drill
Through to General Ledger and underlying transactions.

17. Next you will drill through to GL and underlying transactions. Drill through is
available when you see the link on numeric amounts. If the report is defined
with drill through, then all balances on the report are drillable to Fusion
Account Inspector user interface.
Expand on the financial statement line called Travel Expenses
Drill through on the line for 60512 Airfare, by clicking on the numeric amount
link.

274

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


Drill through to the Detail Balances page which displays the account
combinations that made up the account balance that you drilled from.
You can select the balance of any account combination on the page and
continue to drill down to journal lines, subledger accounting, and subledger
transactions.
18. Try drilling on the period activity balance for account
101.10.60512.466.000.000.

This opens a window that shows the GL journal lines that make up the
account balance. Some of these journals came from Payables, so you can
either click on the journal name to drill down to the GL journal, or you can
click on the amount to drill down to the subledger accounting journal. If you
drilled to the GL journal, you can drill to the subledger accounting journal line
by clicking on the amount on the GL journal line. From the subledger
accounting journal line, click on the View Transaction button to see the AP
invoice.
19. Before we move to the next report, we will change the User POV for a
dimension. Change the Cost Center dimension member to [All Corporate
Cost Centers-V1].[T].[400]. By doing this, we will see how User POV
members will then default to the next report.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

275

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

NOTE: The report has now been updated to Cost Center 400 (tree version
1).
20. Go back to the Financial Reporting Center browser tab. Now select the
Income Statement (Actual vs. Budget) report and select the icon to view
this report in HTML.
21. Leave the prompt as the default value 101 and 102.

276

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Note the User POV values default from the last setting on the previous report.
In the User POV, you can change the cost center back to All Cost Centers
or change the accounting period to a different period to see the data in the
report change dynamically.
22. Click Done when you are finished viewing this report.
23. Next, select the Rolling 12 Month Income Statement and select the icon
to view this report in HTML. This report has been designed to report on
periods for the 12 months up to the selected period, this period range has
been defined using a Function in FR Studio. The range has been defined
relative to the report User POV, meaning it will change if the User POV for the
report changes. If no data is displayed in the report, make sure the currency
is set to USD.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

277

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


24. In the User POV, change the accounting period to a different period. The
range of months for the report will change.
25. If you scroll to the bottom of this report, you will see that it also has an
embedded graph showing the data trend across those 12 months. As you
change the Point of View for the report, the graph will also change.
If you change the accounting period for the report, you will see that the graph
updates to reflect the new values in the report.

The graph also changes to reflect expansions of your data in the report.
26. Click on expansion for Employee Benefits in the table. You will see the
child values are displayed in the report.
If you now scroll down to the graph, you will see that it has also been updated
to include these child values.

27. Once you have had the chance to look at this report, click Done to return to
the Financial Reporting Center page.
28. Try opening a report by clicking on the Excel icon.
29. Open some of the other reports that may be of interest to you. Here are
some noteworthy ones:

278

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


a. The Cost Center and Product Margin report has more than one
dimension in the row axis and allows analysis by both cost center and
product combinations. Set the page level accounting period to Q1-13.
Expand on the Cost Center dimension as shown in the screen on the left.
Collapse the cost center dimension and expand on the Product dimension
as shown on the right. You can also expand both dimensions
simultaneously to see various combinations of cost centers and products
for Revenue.

b. The Financial Highlights report shows two grids in one report with a
graph at the bottom.
c. The Cost Center Expenses by Tree report compares the cost center
structure from before and after an organization restructuring. This is done
by placing two grids on the same report so that the user can see two
different tree versions on the same report. Note Cost Center 820 rolls up
to parent 800 in the v3 tree version, and rolls up to parent 700 in the v4
tree version.
This report allows you to compare different account balances for specified
cost centers prior to the restructuring and afterwards. As shown in this
example, you can have different versions of a tree (or hierarchy), which
enables date-effective hierarchies for reporting. You can report on past,
present or future hierarchies for trend and what-if reporting.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

279

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

280

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Financial Reporting Access Snapshot Reports


1. Within the Financial Reporting Center page, the second tab shows Published
Snapshot Reports and Books.

2. Select each link as follows: Monthly ReportsDec 2013463 Sales North.


These are reports that have been run from a Scheduled Batch at a fixed point
in time so they cannot be changed, and are not re-run against live data each
time they are opened.
3. Open any of the reports in the folder to view them.
The reports are static and include balance information from the time they
were generated. Note that when the report runs you do not see the Point of
View. All the report data is fixed so there are no expansions or drilldowns.
You can change the Company value from the pick list if the report was
published with multiple values for the Company prompt.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

281

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Mobile Financial Reporting Center


The Mobile Financial Reporting Center within Fusion General Ledger:
You can gain real-time visibility to financial reports anytime and anywhere with the
simplified user interface for Financial Reporting Center. This feature will make it easier
for you to access information from your tablet or desktop, and it will empower your
executives, managers, controllers, and casual users to quickly access all financial
results. This simplified user interface is integrated with the Oracle Social Network which
allows you to open up communications and promotes teamwork during the financial
reporting review process.

Financial Reporting Access Live Reports


The following exercise walks through the process in Mobile Financial Reporting Center.
1. From the GSE Launchpad for your demo environment, go to main page called
Primary Login Pages. Select Financial Reporting link.
2. Sign in as anita.kennedy.
3. Select the Reports icon.
4. Notice that Financial Reports are selected in the Show list of values. A table
of reports, books and snapshots are presented in a simple table.
5. You want to review the current periods results compared to the prior period.
Open the Income Statement (Period Comparison) from the list.

282

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

6. Click OK button in the Respond to Prompts window.


7. Report will render
8. Make sure AccountingPeriod = 03-13. Select User POV to change it if
needed.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

283

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

9. Change the User Point of View for Line of Business to 10, for Cost Center to
430 and for Product to 263

284

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

10. Expand the 40000 Revenues row, and then click on the $ amount for the
41000 Revenue under the 03-13 column. A window will open, select Drill to
Detail Balances.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

285

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

11. A new browser tab will open which displays detail balances showing detail
revenue balances for each month between 01-13 and 03-13.

12. At this point, you can analyze the data further. Change the From Accounting
Period to 04-12. Click on Search button.
For the row for Accounting Period 01-13, select the amount -213,703.00.

286

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

13. On the Joural Lines page, drill further down on the account by clicking on the
credit amount 213, 703.

14. The Subledger journal Lines page opens, showing the detail

15. Select the line for 153,483 highlighted above. Select the View Transaction
button. The Transaction Invoice page opens.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

287

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

16. Select tab that contains the Period Comparison Report in Mobile Financial
Reporting Center to continue with this script.
17. We will now start an OSN conversation. Select PDF Preview from the
pulldown menu. After PDF is rendered, select Download to save the pdf to
your pc or network drive. This file will will needed in the following steps for
the Conversation in Oracle Social Network.

288

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

18. Open Oracle Social Network by selecting the OSN icon to the left of the
report.

19. OSN opens . Create a new conversation by pressing the New Conversation
button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

289

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


20. Enter a name for the conversation like Your initials-Period Comparison:
revenue increase (initials are needed for the purposes of the class since
everyone is starting a conversation on the same report). Select OK.

21. A new OSN conversation is created. Add members by selecting the


Members icon.

22. Click on the Manage button to add members

23. Add Casey.Brown to the conversation. Select Save button.

290

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

24. Add the PDF report (saved to your pc/network) to the conversation by
selecting the Add Document icon at the bottom of the page. The Find pdf,
attach, add a comment (optional), and select Upload button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

291

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

25. Now open the PDF attached to the Social conversation to add a Text
Annotation (these annotations are in Oracle Social only). Select Tools and
action.

292

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

26. Highlight the Revenue amount for 03-13. Add Comment. Press Continue.
Then select Publish <Number> Annotations. (you must publish). Then
lastly select Close.

27. The conversation will be displayed in OSN.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

293

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

28. Also, the conversation is in the Mobile Financial Reporting Center user
interface

29. Sign in as Casey.Brown. Review the social conversation. Open PDF, add
comment on PDF as text annotation, and Publish. Also, a normal Add
comment to conversation itself (not the PDF).
30. Sign back in as anita.kennedy, find social conversation and review Casey
Browns comments.

294

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Financial Reporting Studio


Financial Reporting Studio is the tool used to define the reports you see in the Financial
Reporting Center.
Highlighted Features
Create reports with an intuitive drag-and-drop object-based user interface.
Advanced formatting and formulas offer powerful multidimensional reporting,
runtime parameters, expansions and drilldowns.
Instant access to current, relevant data at any level of the accounting hierarchy
Steps
1. Log into Financial Reporting Studio using casey.brown, your assigned password,
and server URL: https://rws2-fapXXXX-bi.oracledemos.com.
2. Navigate to File>New>Report.
3. Place some data on the report by going to Insert > Grid.
4. Take your cursor and draw a box in the body of the report. When you release
your cursor, you will see a window Select Database Connection.
5. Select the Database Connection USChartofAccounts.
6. Click OK.
The Dimension Layout window opens where you can select the row, column, and
page dimensions of your report by dragging dimensions into the grid layout to
select the elements from the Chart of Accounts that will appear in the body of the
report.
7. Drag Company to the page level, AccountingPeriod to the columns, and
Account to the rows.
8. Click OK.
All the unused dimensions will remain in the Point of View for the report so that
the user can modify them to refine the report content at report runtime. The Point
of View for a report is similar to report parameters, but they can be changed
while the report is open, so the user can see different report content without
having to resubmit the report.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

295

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

9. As this will be a simple Income Statement report, double click the Account cell
and select some parent level revenue and expense accounts.
10. Expand on the hierarchy Account>All Corporate Accounts
V1>[Account]@[T]>95001>95011 and 95021.
11. Check the box next to the following accounts: 40000 Revenue, 50000 Material
and Goods, 60000 Operating Expenses, 70000 Extraordinaries & Tax.
12. Move them over to the right side of the window by clicking on the move arrow
pointing to the right.
13. Also check the box at the bottom of the screen Place selections into separate
rows to put the selections in separate rows in your report so that you can control
specific formatting and behavior for each row.

296

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Note that you can add any child accounts or parent accounts from anywhere in
your hierarchy and balances will be shown at that level based on data in the
Essbase cube there is no need for calculations of summary account balances
etc., GL balances are stored at all levels of the hierarchy in real time.
14. After clicking the OK button, you will see the four parent account values in your
report.

15. Enable expansion for all the account values shown on the report simply by
clicking a checkbox. When you have setup tree hierarchies in your Fusion Chart
of Accounts, thats all it takes to have your report instantly display both summary
and detail balances at any level of your account hierarchy you expand a parent
account to see the balances for all the child accounts. At report runtime, users
can drill instantly from a parent account balance to see the real-time child
balances, with no need for re-calculations of summary balances, or re-running
the report for new account data.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

297

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


16. Click on each of the four parent account value cells (40000, 50000, 60000,
70000) and check the Allow Expansion box in the Heading Row Properties
region on the right.

17. You can control the name that is displayed for each row.
18. In the Heading Row Properties region on the right, selecting Member Name will
display the account value;
19. Alias Default will display the account value and description;
20. Both will display a combination of the previous two options.
21. Selecting Custom Heading allows you to enter any text for the row name.
Custom Headings are not recommended for rows with parent values because the
expanded child values will not be uniquely identified.
22. Please select Alias Default for each of the rows in your report.

298

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

23. Add a formula row to the report to create the total for Net Profit.
24. Highlight the row under account 70000 and right click to select Insert Row >
Formula.
25. Click on the = # calculation cell to enter the formula in the top of the screen.
26. To calculate net income, enter [1]+[2]+[3]+[4].
27. Click the green check mark to the left of the formula field to validate that your
formula is correct.

You can use the pull down list to view all the different options for formula
calculations so the report content can contain complex calculations in the same

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

299

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


way as a spreadsheet, but it is simple to select and build these calculations into
the report. For this example, we could have achieved the same result by using
the function Sum([1],[2],[3],[4]).

Report Functions are a very powerful piece of functionality for giving users
exactly the data they want, and easy to setup with a few clicks.
For the Accounting Period, set up a range based on 6 months up-to and
including the user selected period for the report. Here are the steps:

28. For the formula row, select Custom Heading and type Total.
29. Double-click the Accounting Period cell.

30. The Select Members window opens. From the functions tab, select the Range
function. When you click on the move-to-the-right arrow, it will open another
window.

300

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

31. In the Edit Range Function window, click on the Value field in the StartMember
row. Then click on the icon to the right of the Value field. This lets you select the
value for the StartMember parameter.

32. The Edit StartMember Parameter Value window opens. Click on the Function
tab.

33. From the functions tab, select the Relative Member function and click the moveto-the-right arrow.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

301

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

34. Click on the Value field in the Member row. Then click on the icon to the right of
the Value field.

35. Select Current Point of View for Accounting Period and move it to the right.
Click OK.

36. In the Offset row, click on the Value field and enter -6. Click the OK button.
This sets the first accounting period column displayed on the report to be six

302

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


months prior to the currency accounting period selected for the report at runtime,
the second accounting period column to be five months prior, the third
accounting period column to be four months prior, etc.

37. Click the OK button on the Edit StartMember Parameter Value window.
38. In the Edit Range Function window, select the EndMember row and click on the
Value field. Then click on the icon to the right of the Value field.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

303

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


39. Set the value for the EndMember parameter to Current Point of View for
Accounting Period. This sets the last accounting period column displayed on
the report to be the current account period selected for the report at runtime.
Click OK.

40. Click OK on the next window.


41. In the Select Members window, remove Accounting Period option from the right
panel by highlighting it and clicking on the arrow pointing to the left. Click OK to
save the changes.
Report Functions are a very powerful and easy-to-use piece of functionality.
Although it is only one column in FR Studio, at report runtime this function will
display the range of 6 columns on the report for the 6 months up to and including
the accounting period selected by the user.

304

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


42. Preview the report to check your results. Name your report XX Report and save
to Shared Folders>Custom>Financials>. Once the report is saved, it can be
run from within the Financial Reporting Center or Workspace in Fusion GL.
Note: If your report shows #ERROR or #MISSING please check the Point of
View values you are using to run the report to ensure that the report can find
valid data.

Other ways to preview your report is to select either Print Preview or Web
Preview from the File menu in FR Studio.
You can also format rows and columns in the report, such as number formatting
for positive or negative numbers, colors, bold, alignment, and conditional
formatting as you might use in spreadsheets.
43. Select a row, column, or cell and right-clicking to select the Format option.
44. Lets format the Revenue row to display the credit balances as positive numbers
instead of negative numbers. Highlight the row for account 40000.
45. Right-click to select Format.
46. In the Positive Number Symbols region, enter - into the Prefix field, and in the
Negative Number Symbols region, delete the - in the Prefix field. This will
display revenue account balances as positive numbers when there is a credit
accounting balance, and negative when there is a debit accounting balance.
47. Repeat the same formatting steps for the Net Income row.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

305

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Also for the Net Income row, lets add a single line border to the top of the cell,
and a double line border to the bottom of the cell.
48. Highlight the Net Income row, right-click and select Format.
49. In the Format Cells window, select the Borders & Shading tab,
50. click on the single line style and then click on the top border position.
51. Next click on the double line style and then click on the bottom border position.
52. Click the OK button.

Allow report users to drill down from the report content into Fusion General
Ledger to see the underlying transaction details. For something so powerful, it is
very simple to create in the report
53. click the top left cell of the grid to bring up Grid Properties, and check the box
(bottom right) to enable Drill Through. Report users gain visibility into detailed
information easily and efficiently by simply drilling on parent level account
306

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


balances to lower level balances, and even to underlying journals and subledger
details to view the details that make up the balance. Without this feature, this
supporting information would have to be looked up manually.

Defining Prompts for the report rather than Point of View. Prompts are useful for
reports that need to show multiple dimension values (for example a report
showing multiple pages of results across Company values 101, 201 and 301)
whereas a Point of View restricts the selection to a single value.
54.
To do this on the report, double click where it says Pages: to open the Select
Member dialog for the Company segment, and choose Prompt for Company.
55. Then double-click on Prompt for Company in the right side of the window and
it will open a window for you to define the default member values for your
Prompt.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

307

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

56. Click on Hierarchy row.

57. Click OK. In the next window, select the default company value in the Default
Memberfield.

58. Click OK on the remaining windows to save your changes.

308

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

59. Create a title and logo for the report. It is easy to change fonts, colors, formatting,
and also to insert images such as a company logo to produce a professionally
formatted report. Navigate to Insert > Text or Insert > Image. When the cursor
appears, draw a box in the body of the report, and you can click into the box to
enter text for a title or upload an image file.
60. It is easy to add graphs and charts to the report so the report can be presented in
a way that increases the visibility of accounting information and helps users
interpret data more effectively. Graphs dynamically change as you pivot and
change the focus of your online report. The process for creating a chart is
intuitive (similar to creating a graph in a spreadsheet) by choosing the type of
graph and the columns / rows of data you want to appear.
Navigate to Insert > Chart.
61. Choose Chart Type = Line. For the data range, select rows 2,3,4 and column A.

62. You can define multiple grids on a report. For example, you may want to
compare different date-effective hierarchies side by side for what-if analysis
related to a restructuring of the chart of accounts, or you have two different
reports (e.g. balance sheet and cash flow statement) that you want to display in a

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

309

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


single page so that the users can view the two reports side by side. You can do
so by navigating to Insert > Grid and adding a grid to your report.
63. Save your report and view it in Financial Reporting Center.

310

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Workspace
Workspace is the location where Reporting Administrators maintain the folder structure
for storing reports, as well as where they secure and define access privileges to folders
and reports. You can create, open, save, and delete folders. The folders are used to
store report objects, reports, and snapshot reports. You can see Financial Reporting
Studio reports, BI Publisher reports, and OTBI reports stored in Workspace, but you
cannot run all of them from Workspace. BI Publisher reports are run in the Schedule
Processes page. OTBI reports can be run from Workspace or the Reports and
Analytics page. Financial Reporting Studio reports can be run from Workspace or
Financial Reporting Center. Scheduling of Financial Reporting Studio reports is
performed in Workspace.
Highlighted Features
Maintain your folder structure for storing reports, report objects, and snapshot
reports.
Secure and control access to reports and report objects.
Create books or financial report packages for distribution to management for
review.
Run or schedule financial reports, books, and snapshot reports for distribution

Steps
1. Log into the Fusion environment as casey.brown.
2. Navigate to Navigator>General Accounting>Financial Reporting Center.
Click on the Launch Workspace link in the Tasks pane on the left. When
Workspace opens, go to Navigate>Applications>BI Catalog.
3. Expand on the Create icon. The first item on the list, Folder, allows you to create
new folders. The icon with the red X is used to delete folders or reports.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

311

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

4. Navigate through the folder structure as follows: Shared


Folders>Financials>Financial Reports.
5. Highlight either the folder or a report in the folder and right click to select
Permissions. You can secure access to the folder or report using this window
by defining roles and assigning the roles to the permissions window and to the
users.

312

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

6. To create a book or financial reports package, go to the File menu at the top of
the page. Select File>New>Book.

7. In the window that opens, click on the Insert Document icon that is highlighted
in yellow in the screenshot. This opens the window for you to select the reports
to include in the book.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

313

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

8. Select the reports you want to include and click on the Move arrow to move them
over to the right side, Selected Items.
9. When you are done selecting reports, click on OK.
10. Click on the Save icon in the toolbar at the top. This will prompt you to provide a
name for the book and select the folder where you want to store the book.
Please include your initials in the name so we can distinguish it from other users
books.

11. To create a snapshot report, you need to create a batch and schedule the batch
to run at a specific date/time in the future. To create a batch, go back to the
Oracle BI Catalog tab and go to the File menu at the top of the page. Select
File>New>Batch.

314

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

12. In the window that opens, click on the Insert Document icon that is highlighted
in yellow in the screenshot. This opens the window for you to select the reports
to include in the batch for scheduling.

13. Select the reports that you want to include and click on the Move arrow to move
them to the right side, Selected items.
14. When you are done selecting reports, click on OK.
15. Click on the Save icon in the toolbar at the top.
16. After accepting the defaults this will prompt you to provide a name for the batch
and select the folder where you want to store the batch. Please include your
initials in the name so we can distinguish it from other users batches. Click OK
when you are done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

315

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

17. Next, go to Navigate>Schedule>Batch Scheduler.

18. In the window that opens, click on the New Scheduled Batch icon that is
highlighted in yellow.

316

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


19. This opens the Schedule Batch window. Enter a name (no spaces) and
description for your scheduled batch run (please include your initials) and click
on Next.

20. Select the batch that you want to schedule and click on Next.

21. Click OK when asked to provide the login credentials. When the window
refreshes, you are presented with the Scheduled Batch Point of View region
where you can select the parameters for your scheduled report. You can select
to run the report for a specific accounting period, segment value, or any other
dimension value. For example, if you want to create a snapshot report for the
month January 2013 to reflect your balances as of the end of the month, select
January 2013 for the accounting period.
22. Make your selections and click on Next.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

317

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

23. Select your output options. Click Next.

24. Select your notification options, if any. Click the Finish button.

318

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

25. If you scheduled your batch to run immediately, then you can navigate to the
folder when you saved your batch to view the output of your scheduled process.
26. You can now manage your reports and control access to them in Workspace.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

319

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

Account Inspector
Account Inspector is used to inquire on account balances online in a browser. The
unique pivot table functionality gives users the ability to slice and dice balances in a
multidimensional manner. With full drill down functionality, you can easily access
account balance information and supporting journals.
Highlighted Features
Online analysis of real-time account balances in a browser window.
o You get up-to-date data instantly, so your decisions are always based on
current, correct information. You can perform multidimensional data
analysis by dragging and dropping dimensions around in a pivot table.
Drill down from parent-level account balances to lower level account balances
and to the underlying journals.
o You get instant access to the details you need to investigate and resolve
any issues.
Steps
1. Log into your Fusion environment with your own login.
2. There are two ways to navigate to Account Inspector:

If you have an account group defined in Account Monitor


(Navigator>General Accounting>General Accounting Dashboard), drill
down from Account Monitor to Account Inspector by clicking Inquire and
Analyze Balances.

Navigator>General Accounting>Financial Reporting Center. Select


Inquire and Analyze Balances link in Tasks pane.

3. When the Account Inspector page opens, the column has the Accounting Period
dimension, and the row has the Natural Account dimension by default. The
Accounting Period defaults to the latest open period, and the Account defaults to
the first row of the default account group in Account Monitor if one is defined;
otherwise it defaults to the lowest value.

320

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting

4. Select values for each dimension in the Page Level Dimensions box to retrieve
the data you are looking for.
5. You can drag and drop more than one dimension into the rows or columns in
Account Inspector. Try dragging the cost center dimension to the rows, and
dragging the company dimension to the columns. Note that if you want to
change the value of the Account dimension or the Accounting Period dimension,
drag and drop the dimension into the Page Level Dimensions box, and select the
desired values. Account Inspector always requires at least one dimension to be
present in the row and column. So you would need to drag another dimension
from the Page Level Dimensions box and drop it into the row or column before
you can move the Accounting Period or Account dimension into the Page Level
Dimensions box.

6. If the dimension value in the row or column is a parent value, you can expand on
the parent value to view the child values and their account balances.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

321

Lesson 18: Financial Reporting


7. You can drill down on account balances from Account Inspector to Detail
Balances, journal lines and subledger transactions when all chart of account
dimension members for an account balance are specified at the lowest level
(Level 0) in the row, column and page. These account balances which are
available for drilldown are hyperlinks and are highlighted with brighter font color
on the page. You can click on the link and the Detail Balances page opens.
8. You can export the query you create in Account Inspector by clicking on the
Excel spreadsheet icon in the upper left corner of the page.

322

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 19: OTBI (Online Transactional Business Intelligence)

Lesson 19: OTBI (Online Transactional Business Intelligence)

Background

This activity has been provided to introduce you to Oracle OTBI functionality in Fusion
Applications and the basic navigation features.
Activity Scope
This demonstration introduces you to the OTBI subject areas and helps you create a
simple Invoice Listing.
Sign in as Your User (as assigned by the instructor).

Perform the following tasks:


1. After you sign in, you click on Navigator Reports and Analytics
2. Click on Create Select Subject Area (Payables Invoices - Transactions
Real Time)
3. You can see several folders in this area.
4. To create an OTBI report, the first step is to select columns for the report.
5. Expand the Business Unit folder. Move the Business Unit Name to selected
columns by clicking on > button.
6. Expand the Supplier folder. Move the Supplier to selected columns by clicking
on > button.
7. Expand the Supplier Site folder. Move the Site name to selected columns by
clicking on > button.
8. Expand the Invoice General Details folder. Move the Invoice Number to
selected columns by clicking on > button. Also, move the Invoice Date to
selected columns from the same folder.
9. Expand the Invoice Amount folder. Move the Invoice Amount to the selected
columns.
10. Click on Next to select views for this report.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

323

Lesson 19: OTBI (Online Transactional Business Intelligence)


11. Specify the Title for the report. Enter XX Invoice Listing where XX is the
number provided to you by the instructor.
12. Specify the Table for your report output. Click on down arrow to pick
Table(recommended).
13. Click on the Preview checkbox. You can preview your report output before
proceeding further.
14. Click on Next.
15. To create prompt on Business Unit, click on Business Unit Name column. From
the Move To drop down, select Prompt For. This will allow the report user to
choose the BU from a prompt - the report will be displayed for only this BU.
16. To section the report by Supplier, click on the Supplier column. From the Move
To drop down, select Section By.
17. Click on Next.
18. Sort the report by Supplier. To do this, click on the down arrow for Add Sort and
select Supplier.
19. Create a filter for Invoice Date range. To do this, click on the down arrow for Add
Filter and select Invoice Date. From the Operator drop down, select is
between 1/1/2012 and 12/31/2012.
20. Click on Next.
21. No conditional formatting will be applied. Click on Next.
22. Enter Analysis name as XX Invoice Listing where XX is the number provided
by your instructor.
23. Save in Shared Folders>Custom>Financials.
24. Click on Submit.
25. Click OK on the confirmation window.
26. From the Reports and Analytics Task pane, click on Shared Folders >
Custom > Financials XX Invoice Listing and click on View hyperlink.
(Please note that you can optionally edit the report for making any further
changes. If you click on the More hyperlink, you will be taken to BI Answers
Tool). For the purposes of this exercise, please click on the View hyperlink
instead of the Edit or More hyperlinks.

324

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 19: OTBI (Online Transactional Business Intelligence)


27. You can now view your report results. You can pick US1 Business Unit on the
Business Unit Name drop down to view the various Suppliers and their Invoicing
Data.

This exercise demonstrates how easy it is for a user to create a simple report based
upon the subject areas provided in the OTBI tool by Oracle Fusion.
28. You can also review some OTBI ad hoc reports weve defined for demonstration
purposes. Navigate to Shared Folders>Custom>Demo OTBI Ad Hoc Query
Reports. [Folders under the Shared directory can be accessed by anyone with
the BI Platform Administrator role. For users who should not have an
administrator role, you will need to create a custom role and assign the role to
both the users and to the folders that they can access.]
29. Open any of the reports by clicking on the report name and selecting View. The
Assets Subledger Journals Report, GL Journal Report by Cost Center, and
Supporting References reports demonstrate how transactions can be queried
by specific segment values.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

325

Lesson 20: Integration with Oracle Fusion Financials Cloud Service

Lesson 20: Integration with Oracle Fusion Financials Cloud Service


Activity Scope

1.

Review Whitepaper

2.

View Web Services

3.

View File Based Data Import

4.

View ADFdi

Review Whitepaper:
1. Review whitepaper: Integration with Oracle Fusion Financials Cloud Service.
View Web Services:
1. Navigate to Oracle Enterprise Repository (OER):
https://fusionappsoer.oracle.com/oer/
2. Log in with your Oracle credentials.
3. Click on the button Log In as Guest.
4. To view web services, Enter Search String: EXTERNAL, select Type: ADF
Service. Click Search.
5. Select the row of your choice. In the bottom half of the screen, click on the
Overview tab to view the overview. Click on the Documentation tab, click on
the link that opens a PDF with step by step instructions to invoke the service,
review the PDF.

View File Based Data Import:


1. Navigate to Oracle Enterprise Repository (OER):
https://fusionappsoer.oracle.com/oer/
2. Log in with your Oracle credentials.

326

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 20: Integration with Oracle Fusion Financials Cloud Service


3. Click on the button Log In as Guest.
4. To view File Based Data Import, Enter Search String: FBDI, select Type:
Scheduled Process. Click Search.
5. Select the row of your choice. In the bottom half of the screen, click on the
Overview tab to view the overview. Click on the Documentation tab, click on
the link Usage Documentation for step by step instructions. Right-click on the
link Spreadsheet Template and select Save As to download the template.
6. Each of the templates provides instructions on the first tab for completing the
spreadsheet and loading it to Fusion.
7. In general, after completing the spreadsheet, you click on a button in the
spreadsheet to generate a zip file. The zip file is placed on the SFTP server
using an application like FileZilla.
8. Next, log into Fusion and navigate to Tools>Schedule Processes, and run the
Load Interface File for Import program. After this program completes
successfully, then run the respective import program to load the data into the
respective Fusion application.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

327

Lesson 21: Entering Suppliers

Lesson 21: Entering Suppliers


Background

The following show the different ways to enter suppliers via the UI and via
spreadsheets.
To Enter Suppliers Manually in the UI:
1. Select Navigator > Procurement > Suppliers
2. Select Create Suppliers link.
3. Enter the required information and click Create.

4. Select the Addresses tab and enter the required fields.


5. In the Address Details region, in the Sites tab, click the + sign.

328

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 21: Entering Suppliers

6. Select the Procurement BU and Site Purpose.


7. Save.
8. Optionally enter information for Transaction Tax, Contacts.
9. Click the Payments tab.
10. In the Bank Accounts tab (under Payments) click the Create icon to create a
bank account. Enter the required information, such as Country and Account
Number. To select a Bank Name and Branch, you need to have them defined in
Cash Management using FSM.
To set up Banks and Branches: (N) Setup and Maintenance > Define Invoicing
and Payments Configuration > Define Cash Management and Banking
Configuration > Set up Banks, Branches and Accounts.
11. When finished creating your supplier, click Save and Close.
To Enter Suppliers via a Spreadsheet Using OER (Oracle Enterprise Repository):
1. Access this link: https://fusionappsoer.oracle.com/oer/
2. Select the Login as Guest button
3. Query based on FBDI and Scheduled Processes

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

329

Lesson 21: Entering Suppliers


4. We have spreadsheets for Suppliers, Supplier Sites, Supplier Site Contacts, Site
Assignments, and Bank Accounts. Note: Use your right mouse button to
download the spreadsheets.

5. When you complete all the spreadsheets, you need to use a FTP tool to load the
data into the interface tables and run import processes to load the data to Fusion
Procurement. There are instructions on each in the instructions tab of each
spreadsheet.
6. Then to view the imported suppliers, use the Manage Suppliers link to query and
view them.

330

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 22: Entering Customers

Lesson 22: Entering Customers


Background

The following show the different ways to enter customers manually via the UI and via
spreadsheets.
NOTE: When entering customers using our UIs, there are two. If you just want to enter
the simple required customer information, you can use the Create Customer page. After
that, if you want to enter other information such as contacts, tax, profile, etc., you need
to use the Manage Customer page.
To Quickly Enter Customers Manually (Quick Method):
1. Select Navigator >Receivables > Billing
2. Click the Create Customer link. This will open the Create Organization Customer
page.
3. Enter all the required fields, such as Organization Name.
To Enter Customers Manually (Long Method):
1. Select Navigator >Receivables > Billing
2. Click the Manage Customers link. This will open the Manage Customers page.
3. Click the Create icon.
4. Enter all the required fields.
NOTE: If you create a Customer Profile, then most of the attributes can be defaulted
by assigning the profile to the customer. This is a bit quicker if you have lots of
customers to enter. In the Manage Customer page, there is a field for profile class, if
you select one there, it helps to default in some attributes.
To Enter Customers via a Spreadsheet Using OER (Oracle Enterprise Repository):
Note: The following instructions are for Cloud customers to import customers.
1. Access this link: https://fusionappsoer.oracle.com/oer/
2. Select the Login as Guest button.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

331

Lesson 22: Entering Customers


3. Query based on FBDI and Scheduled Processes.
4. Find the file called Import Trading Community Data in Bulk. Note: Use your
right mouse button to download the spreadsheet from OER.
5. Follow the instructions on the Instructions tab. You will need to use a FTP loader
tool to populate interface tables and then run import programs to import them into
Fusion.
To Enter Customers in Bulk (For On Premise ONLY):
There is a document loaded here:
https://beehiveonline.oracle.com/content/dav/Oracle/Fusion_ERP_Partner_Implementat
ion_Training_Workspace/Documents/Financials/Implementation%20Training%20for%2
0Release%205/Importing%20Data%20(i.e.,%20Suppliers%20and%20Customers)/How
_to_Import_Customers_On_Premise.doc
If you cannot access this document, send an email to Theresa.Hickman@Oracle.com.

332

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings

Note: If you are a Financials only customer, you should use the Manage Users UI to
enter users and employees. This is the only way to make approvals work because you
need to assign a Department, Manager, Position etc. to the user depending on how you
want to structure your approval rules.
If implementing Financials and HCM, then you should use the Hire New Person UI.
Prerequisite: Define Role Mapping
It is best practice to define a Role Mapping before you create users to automatically
assign, reassign, and remove roles from users based on the conditions you specify.
Note: The following link includes details about this feature:
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E25178_01/fusionapps.1111/e20378/F648748AN1DBEA.htm
1.

Navigator -> Setup and Maintenance > Query the Implementation


Project > Define Common Applications Configuration for Financials >
Define Security for Financials > Define Users for Financials > Manage
HCM Role Provisioning Rules
This will open the Manage Role Mappings page.

2.

Click the Create icon.

3.

Specify a Mapping Name.

4.

Specify all the conditions that apply to automatically assign roles to users
as they get hired, change jobs, or change managers.
Note: See screen shot below for an example.

5.

In the Associated Roles table, click the Add icon.

6.

Assign the Data Role you want to have the system automatically assign.
For subledger users, the data role should have the Business Unit context.
For GL users, the data role should have the Data Access Set context.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

333

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings

7.

Check the appropriate check boxes:


Requestable means HR specialists and line managers can
provision roles manually to other users. Only line managers that
satisfy all conditions associated with the role mapping can manually
assign roles to users.
Self-requestable means a user can request the role be assigned
to him/her.
Autoprovision means you want the role automatically assigned to
the user when they meet all the conditions you specified.
Click the Apply Auto Provisioning button if you want to have the
system automatically provision this role to all users who do not
already have the role assigned. It also will deprovision roles
immediately from users who are no longer eligible for roles that
they currently have.

8.

Click Save and Close, then Done.

9.

Now you can enter your users in either the Manage Users UI or the Hire
an Employee UI. For Financials Only implementations, you should use the
Manage Users UI.
Navigator -> Setup and Maintenance > Query the Implementation
Project > Define Common Applications Configuration for Financials >
Define Security for Financials > Define Users for Financials > Manage
Users
-ORNavigator -> Manager Resources > Manage Users

334

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings


10. Select the Create Icon.
11. Enter the User details based on the screen shot below and then click the
Autoprovision Roles button.
Note: The Employment Information must match the conditions in the Role
Mapping exactly to get the role automatically assigned when you click the
Autoprovision Roles button.

1.

You should see the Employee role and other roles as defined in your Role
Mapping.

2.

Click Save and Close.

3.

Sign Out

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

335

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings

How to Create Employees from HCMs Hire an Employee UI


Note: The Person defining a new user in HCM should first have following roles
assigned to him in Fusion.

1. Login as matthew.schneider/ (Password given in classroom).


Note: If you have issues, try matthew.schnieder. (Switch the e and i.)
Note: The reason why you need to log in as this user is because the New Hire
process, by default, goes to 2 levels of approvers based on the person who
originally entered the new hire.
2. Select Navigator > Manager Resources > New Person
3. Click the Hire an Employee link.
4. Select the Create icon and enter the following required fields:

336

Hire Date: 1/1/12

Hire Action: Hire

Legal Employer: US1 Legal Entity

Last Name:

First Name:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Click Next
Fill out Address details
Fill out email details and leave the rest blank.
Click Next
Leave this section Blank

10. Fill in Business Unit, Job, Department & Location.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

337

Lesson 23: Creating Users/Employees in HCM Using Role Mappings


11. Scroll down and expand Expenses Information. (This is needed for Expense
Reporting).
12. Enter the following:

Default expense Account: 101.10.60501.121.000.000

Expense Check Send-to Address: Home

13. Click Next. The Employee role will be automatically assigned.


14. Click Next.
15. Click Submit.
16. Log out and log in as Roger.Bolton (the new hires manager). From the
Welcome page, in the Approvals region, select the task and click the Complete
button.

338

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

OSN is a secure enterprise social network that allows you to collaborate within and
outside your organization. Available collaboration tools include groups, activity feeds,
discussion forums, document sharing, instant messaging, email and web conferencing.
By bringing key attributes from the applications to share, socialize and update
information, you can make better business decisions. Multiple participants can view and
annotate content together in real-time, allowing faster and more effective content
reviews. Participants can use live presence and chat to actively engage others within
the system.
You do this by defining which business objects and attributes to enable and the
enablement method for Oracle Social Network integration with Oracle Fusion
Applications. Once enabled, these business objects can be shared in collaborative
conversations.
Note: Oracle Social Network can be accessed from a Web browser, Outlook
application, or Mobile and Tablet devices.
Note: Oracle Social Network is currently not available in non-Cloud implementations.

Using OSN
When you log into Fusion Applications, OSN should be enabled by default.
Two ways to access OSN:
Click the Social link on the global toolbar
Select Navigator > Social Network

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

339

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

When you are entering a transaction, save the transaction and then click the OSN icon
to start conversations:

If you are a new user, then you will need to click the Social icon and join the group
before you can see the conversations.

340

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Configuring OSN
A business object cannot be shared within Oracle Social Network until a functional administrator or
implementor accesses the Manage Oracle Social Network Objects page and enables the business object
for OSN integration.

1. Navigator > Setup and Maintenance> All Tasks


2. Search by Tasks, Name: Manage Oracle Social Network Objects

3. Select Go to Task icon.


4. You will see a complete list of all business objects that can be enabled for OSN.

Note: In Release 8, the OSN objects are segregated by product family, such as
Financials, HMC, CRM, etc. Right now, you see everything.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

341

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)


5. You can determine if information about a business object is displayed in Oracle
Social Network, and select attributes to include for that business object.
6. To enable a business object, highlight the object, then click the Enable Object
button.

7. You can choose the following:


Manual: Recommended; this means thee object is enabled for manual
sharing where the user decides to share each instance of the object with
OSN. Once shared, all updates to enabled attributes of the object
instance, and deletes, are sent to OSN. Updates to attributes that are not
enabled are not sent.

Automatic: Automatically sends newly enabled object instances and


updates to OSN. All object instances are automatically shared upon
creation and all subsequent updates to enabled attributes of the object
instances, and deletes, are automatically sent to OSN.

No: Does not send any object instance information to OSN.

Note: After you enable an object, you must enable one or more attributes. If you
do not configure any attributes for the enabled business object, unexpected
results can occur as no attributes are sent to OSN during create and update.
Deletes are sent as usual.
8. When complete, Save and Close.
Note: The Update Translations button will synchronize the newly translated text
from Oracle Fusion Applications so that it can be used within OSN. This means
you can install and enable a new language or take a language patch at any time.
The Update Translations button sends translations for all business objects whose
enablement is Manual or Automatic.

342

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Enabling OSN for Mobile Devices (iPhone, iPad, iOS and Android)
OSN Social Objects in Fusion R8
Oracle Social Network (OSN) will enable business users to collaborate with key
individuals within their organization and external contacts like suppliers and partners
using critical transaction data from Fusion Applications. OSN enables business users to
collaborate with each other using a range of collaboration tools including groups, activity
feeds, discussion forums, document sharing, instant messaging, email, and web
conferencing.
By bringing key attributes from the application into the collaboration experience,
individuals are able to share, socialize, and update information with the goal of making
better business decisions based on additional information obtained and analyzed within
their social network environment.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

343

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Downloading OSN applications for mobile


1. Download Application: Go to your Android Play Store or Apple Store on your
mobile and find Oracle Social Network app

2.

344

Install app: Click on Install to install the app. You will then find the OSN App
icon displayed on your mobile device

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Configuring connection of your mobile to OSN


1. Configuring app to connect to GSE server: Click on the icon to open it. Enter
following information:
a. Username / Password same as Fusion user login
b. Account name: Any name
c. Server: https://fapxxxx-osn.oracleads.com/client
replace fapxxxx by the one corresponding to your Fusion environment
(check the URL when logging in Fusion)
Note: You have to be careful to change the password on your OSN account
every week,
OSN for iOS

OSN for Android

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

345

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

2. Click on Connect button

3. You will then be able to access all OSN functionality from your mobile device.

346

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

347

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

Configuring Connection of your Mobile to OSN


1. Go to Index page (index.html) of your GSE environment > Click on Fusion
Apps OSN hyperlink under Others .
Opens the OSN web client
2. On the blue bar towards the top of the page, to the right (next to the user name)
you will see an inverted triangle icon > Click on it to open an List of Values

3. Select Download > Opens Download page

4. Click on the hyperlink on that page Download Oracle Social Network Add-in
for Microsoft Outlook

348

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)


5. That will open OTN on a new browser window

6. Check Accept License Agreement radio button > Click on hyperlink Download
Oracle Social Network Add-In for Outlook (It may prompt you for Oracle
Single Sign-On login)
7. It will then download outlook_social_network_setup.exe

8. Save File > Open it from download location to run the exe file
Note for Windows 7 users: Recommend opening the folder where you
download the exe file > right click on file name > select Run as Administrator >
to install with access to all windows resources necessary for the install)
9. Following configuration instructions on OTN page, to complete configuration of
Oracle Social Network Add-In for Outlook.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

349

Lesson 24: Enabling Oracle Social Network (OSN)

350

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Lesson 25: Appendix


Appendix Activities
The following are supplemental Activities for the Appendix:

Prepare for User and Role Management.

Prepare the IT Security Manager Job Role.

Synchronize LDAP Users and Roles to Initialize HCM User Management.

Create Security Administrators.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

351

Lesson 25: Appendix

Prepare for User and Role Management


Prepare the Oracle Fusion Applications super user for user management and
configuration.

Update the Oracle Fusion Applications super user ID in LDAP (Oracle


Internet Directory) with an E-mail address.

Reconcile LDAP and Oracle Identity Manager.

Prepare the IT Security Manager job role for user and role management.

Provision the IT Security Manager role with the following OIM roles:
- Identity User Administrators
- Role Administrators

Assign the IT Security Manager role to the Xellerate users organization.

Synchronize LDAP with HCM user management.

352

Perform the Run User and Roles Synchronization Process task.

Monitor completion of the SyncRolesJob process to ensure that the latest


roles definitions can be assigned to implementation users.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Prepare the IT Security Manager Job Role (NA for Cloud)


Background
The super user that was created when installing and provisioning Oracle Fusion
Applications (for example, FAADMIN) has all necessary access for implementing Oracle
Fusion Applications and administering security. This access is provided by the following
roles:

Application Implementation Consultant

IT Security Manager

Neither of these roles provides access needed for creating and managing Oracle Fusion
Applications users. Therefore, you must add the following two OIM roles to the IT
Security Manager role:

Identity User Administrators, which carries user management entitlement

Role Administrators, which carries role management entitlement

Activity Scope
Provision the IT Security Manager with the necessary roles Oracle Identity Manager.
Assign the IT Security Manager role to the Xellerate Users organization.
Steps
6. While signed into Oracle Identity Manager as the OIM System Administrator user
(for example, XELSYSADMIN), click the Administration link in the upper right of
the Oracle Identity Manager. This accesses the Welcome to Identity Manager
Delegated Administration menu.
7. In the Roles list of tasks, click Advanced Search Roles.
8. Provision the IT Security Manager job role with the Identity User Administrators
and Role Administrators OIM roles using the following steps.
a. Search for the Identity Users Administrators role by entering the role name in
the Display Name field and clicking Search.
b. In the Search Results, click the role's Display Name.
c. On the Hierarchy tab, click Inherits From.
d. Click Add.
e. In the Add Parent Role to: IDENTITY USER ADMINISTRATORS window,
select the role category: Common Job Roles.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

353

Lesson 25: Appendix


f. Click the arrow icon to show the list of available roles.
g. Select IT Security Manager and move it to the Roles to Add list.
h. Click Save.
i. Search for the Role Administrators role, and repeat steps 4 to 11 to add that
role to the IT Security Manager role's role inheritance.
9. Assign the IT Security Manager role to the Xellerate Users organization using the
following steps.
a. In the Welcome to Identity Manager Delegated Administration menu (see step
1 of this procedure), in the Organizations list of tasks, click Advanced Search
Organizations
b. Search for the Xellerate Users organization by entering Xellerate Users in the
Display Name field and clicking Search.
c. In the Search Results, click the organization's Display Name. The Xellerate
Users page appears.
d. Click the Administrative Roles link in the row of links above the Xellerate
Users.
e. In the Filter By Role Name field of the Details window, enter the following
string:
*IT_SECURITY_MANAGER*
f. Click Find.
g. Enable Read, Write, Delete, and Assign.
h. Click Assign.
i. Click Confirm.
At this point, the Oracle Fusion Applications super user can proceed with signing into
Oracle Fusion Applications to generate functional setup tasks by configuring the offering
being implemented and generating the offering's setup task lists. See Synchronize
LDAP Users with HCM User Management for information about signing in as the super
user.

354

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Synchronize LDAP Users and Roles to Initialize HCM User


Management
Background
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) must be synchronized with HCM user
management so that users can be provisioned with roles through HCM.
As an initial task, this super user synchronizes LDAP users with HCM user
management before creating implementation users.
Activity Scope
The Oracle Fusion Applications super user synchronizes LDAP users with HCM user
management.
Steps
10. Sign in to Oracle Fusion Applications using the super user's user name (for
example FAADMIN) and password.
If you do not know the super user name and password, check with your system
administrator or the person who installed Oracle Fusion Applications. For more
information about Oracle Fusion Applications provisioning, see the Oracle Fusion
Applications Installation Guide. If you have generated functional setup task lists,
expand the Define Common Applications Configuration task list for the offering
you are implementing and proceed with step 5. Otherwise, proceed with step 3
11. Go to Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks.
12. Search for the Run User and Roles Synchronization Process task.
13. Access the Run User and Roles Synchronization Process task by clicking its Go
to Task icon in the search results.
14. Perform the task by clicking Submit in the Process Details page.
The SyncRolesJob process takes some time to complete the first time it is run.
15. Monitor completion of the SyncRolesJob process from Navigator > Tools >
Scheduled Processes before continuing with creating implementation users.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

355

Lesson 25: Appendix

Create Security Administrators (NA for Cloud)

Background
To segregate duties appropriately, create users dedicated to security administration,
such as an IT security manager user or security administrator user.
Activity Scope
Perform the Create Implementation Users task.
Steps
16. Sign in to Oracle Fusion Applications using the super user's user name (for
example FAADMIN) and password.
17. Go to Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks.
18. Search for the Create Implementation Users task.
19. Perform the task by clicking its Go to Task icon in the search results. The Oracle
Identity Manager appears.
20. Click Create User.
For details, see the Creating Users section in the Oracle Fusion Middleware
User's Guide for Oracle Identity Manager.
a. Provide a last name.
b. Set the organization to Xellerate Users.
c. Set the User Type to Non Worker.
d. Enter the desired user login and password.
e. Click Save.
f. Open the Roles tab.
g. Click Assign.
h. Search for the security administration role you wish to provision, such as
IT_SECURITY_MANAGER.
i. Close the User Creation page.

356

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Fusion Security Activities

The following are Security Activities for the Fusion Cloud training:
1.

Prepare for User and Role Management.

2.

Prepare the IT Security Manager Job Role.

3.

Synchronize LDAP Users and Roles to Initialize HCM User Management.

4.

Create Security Administrators.

5.

Create Implementation Project Managers.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

357

Lesson 25: Appendix

Prepare for User and Role Management

Prepare the Oracle Fusion Applications super user for user management and
configuration.
1.

Update the Oracle Fusion Applications super user ID in LDAP (for example
Oracle Internet Directory) with an E-mail address.

Go Task, Create Implementation Users, click to Task icon

This opens OIM, Oracle Identity Manager to a generic Self Service Page. Self
Service meaning you are on the page to manage the tasks etc. assigned to your
current login, i.e., FIN_IMPL.
To get to other users/real work etc. click Administration link

358

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Search for User (Note: could also search for user from middle of the page)

Review email address (no need to change)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

359

Lesson 25: Appendix

Prepare the IT Security Manager Job Role

Background
The super user that was created when installing and provisioning Oracle Fusion
Applications (for example, FAADMIN) has all necessary access for implementing Oracle
Fusion Applications and administering security. This access is provided by the following
roles:
1.

Application Implementation Consultant

2.

IT Security Manager

Note: Cloud User will also have Applications Diagnostic Administrator


Neither of these roles provides access needed for creating and managing Oracle Fusion
Applications users. Therefore, you must add the following two OIM roles to the IT
Security Manager role:
3.

Identity User Administrators, which carries user management entitlement

4.

Role Administrators, which carries role management entitlement

Activity Scope
Provision the IT Security Manager with the necessary roles Oracle Identity Manager.
Assign the IT Security Manager role to the Xellerate Users organization.
Steps
1. While signed into Oracle Identity Manager as the OIM System Administrator user
(for example, XELSYSADMIN), click the Administration link in the upper right of
the Oracle Identity Manager. This accesses the Welcome to Identity Manager
Delegated Administration menu.

360

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

2. In the Roles list of tasks, click Advanced Search Roles.

3. Provision the IT Security Manager job role with the Identity User Administrators
and Role Administrators OIM roles using the following steps.
a. Search for the IDENTITY USER ADMINISTRATORS role by entering the role
name in the Display Name field and clicking Search.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

361

Lesson 25: Appendix

b. In the Search Results, click the role's Display Name.


c. On the Hierarchy tab, click Inherits From.

d. Click Add.
e. In the Add Parent Role to: IDENTITY USER ADMINISTRATORS window, select
the role category: Common Job Roles.

362

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

f. Click the arrow icon to show the list of available roles.


g. Select IT Security Manager and move it to the Roles to Add list.
h. Click Save.

Note: If this has already been done, you will receive the following:

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

363

Lesson 25: Appendix

i. Search for the Role Administrators role, and repeat steps 4 to 11 to add that role
to the IT Security Manager role's role inheritance.

Note: this time check first to see if IT Security Manager is already inherited.

364

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix


4. Assign the IT Security Manager role to the Xellerate Users organization using the
following steps.
a. In the Welcome to Identity Manager Delegated Administration menu (see step
1 of this procedure), in the Organizations list of tasks, click Advanced Search
Organizations

b. Search for the Xellerate Users organization by entering Xellerate Users in the
Display Name field and clicking Search.

c. In the Search Results, click the organization's Display Name. The Xellerate Users
page appears.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

365

Lesson 25: Appendix

366

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Synchronize LDAP Users and Roles to Initialize HCM User


Management

Background
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) must be synchronized with HCM user
management so that users can be provisioned with roles through HCM.
As an initial task, this super user synchronizes LDAP users with HCM user
management before creating implementation users.
Activity Scope
The Oracle Fusion Applications super user synchronizes LDAP users with HCM user
management.
Steps
5. Sign in to Oracle Fusion Applications using the super user's user name (for
example FAADMIN) and password.
If you do not know the super user name and password, check with your system
administrator or the person who installed Oracle Fusion Applications. For more
information about Oracle Fusion Applications provisioning, see the Oracle Fusion
Applications Installation Guide. If you have generated functional setup task lists,
expand the Define Common Applications Configuration task list for the offering
you are implementing and proceed with step 5. Otherwise, proceed with step 3
6. Go to Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks.
7. Search for the Run User and Roles Synchronization Process task.
8. Access the Run User and Roles Synchronization Process task by clicking its Go
to Task icon in the search results.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

367

Lesson 25: Appendix


9. Perform the task by clicking Submit in the Process Details page.
The SyncRolesJob process takes some time to complete the first time it is run.

Note the request number

10. Monitor completion of the SyncRolesJob process from Navigator > Tools >
Scheduled Processes before continuing with creating implementation users.

368

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Create Security Administrators

Background
To segregate duties appropriately, create users dedicated to security administration,
such as an IT security manager user or security administrator user.
Activity Scope
Perform the Create Implementation Users task.
Steps
1. Sign in to Oracle Fusion Applications using the super user's user name (for
example FAADMIN) and password.
2. Go to Navigator > Tools > Setup and Maintenance > All Tasks.
3. Search for the Create Implementation Users task.
4. Perform the task by clicking its Go to Task icon in the search results. The Oracle
Identity Manager appears.

Note: Remember to click the Administration button on the top right hand side.
5. Click Create User.

For details, see the Creating Users section in the Oracle Fusion Middleware User's

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

369

Lesson 25: Appendix


Guide for Oracle Identity Manager.

6. Provide a last name.


7. Set the organization to Xellerate Users.
8. Set the User Type to Non Worker.
9. Enter the desired user login and password.
10. Click Save.

11. Open the Roles tab.


12. Click Assign.
13. Search for the security administration role you wish to provision, such as
IT_SECURITY_MANAGER.

14. Close the User Creation page.

370

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Appendix

Create Implementation Project Managers

Background
Implementation project managers are responsible for managing an Oracle Fusion
Applications implementation. At least one user must be provisioned with one of the
following roles for an Oracle Fusion Applications implementation to begin.
1.

Application Implementation Manager

2.

Application Implementation Consultant

Activity Scope
The IT security manager user performs the Create Implementation Users task to create
an implementation project manager user.
Steps
1. Sign in to Oracle Fusion Applications using the IT security manager's or
administrator's user name and password.
2. Create and provision the implementation project manager user with the following
roles. Use the same task flow as for creating the security administrators.
- Application Implementation Manager
- Application Implementation Consultant
For additional information about which roles to provision implementation managers with,
see the Oracle Fusion Applications Information Technology Management, Implement
Applications Guide. See the Oracle Fusion Applications Security Reference Manuals for
information about the predefined Oracle Fusion Applications roles.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

371

Anda mungkin juga menyukai